Home

INR-SI47-1059b_E - Fuji Electric GmbH

1. D3 BEECH ML L 0 Power Dimensions mm suppl Type a e afm pee u on 0 om FRN7 5F1S 20 FRN11F1S 20 220 196 63 5 46 5 46 5 260 238 ne fart 2a 1 ea fass ass aso a FRN18 5F 18 20 allog FRN22F1S 20 aso am FRN30F1S 20 FRN7 5F1S 40 FRN11F1S 40 196 46 5 260 Three FERN 15F1S 40 phase 400 V_ ERN18 5F1S 40 zofa FRN22F1S 40 250 226 400 o FRN30F1S 40 a w Ny Ny w D yN O O N D w jv N w lol nle om A o A gt Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 8 13 Unit mm B o oy I oO o ol N or N o a 10 615 595 _ ae I o on N N N N N N o O o N aN O wo Q oO a Dimensions mm supply ype voltage Three ERNGTFIS 20 ahas
2. Base Fixing Screws A Case Fixing Screws M6 Top me Mounting Base boty X Dy Base Fixing Screws ce y Case Fixing Screws Figure B Figure 2 3 Relocating the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases ACAUTION When moving the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws A fire or an accident may be caused 2 4 3 Mounting direction Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it securely with four screws or bolts so that the logo FRENIC Eco can be seen from the front Note Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run 4 Solving abnormal vibration after installation If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration to the cooling fan s or the keypad fix them firmly using the fixing screws provided as accessories E Fixing the cooling fan s Table 2 4 Fixing Screws Power Nominal Tightening Screw size supply applied motor Inverter type torque Refer to accessory voltage N m FRN7 5F1S 20 FRN11F1S 20 M4x35 4 pcs FRN15F1S 20 FRN18 5F1S 20 FRN22F1S 20 M4x50 2 pcs FRN30F1S 20 FRN7 5F1S 40 FRN11F1S 40 M4x35 4 pcs FRN15F1S 40 FRN18 5F1S 40 FRN22F1S 40 M4x50 2 pcs 30 FRN30F1S 40 Note A box O
3. The inverter has either FMP or FMI depending on the type of the control printed circuit board control PCB The control PCB with a screw terminal base has FMP and it does not display _ 4 the one with a Europe type LI TIL terminal block has FMI and it does not display 4_ 5 or 4_ Lib 3 21 E Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminal may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 16 and the figure below each of segments a to g on LED1 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or fe is closed it goes off when it is open 1 Segment a to c and e on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 Y2 or Y3 and terminal CMY or Y5A and see is closed and does not light when the circuit is open Segment a and e to g on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C and terminals Y1A Y2A and Y3A on the relay output option card Segment a or e to g on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A or the relay terminal circuit of Y1A Y2A or Y3A is short circuited ON respectively and does not light when it is open C Tip If all terminal input signals are OFF open segments g on all of LED1 to LED4 will blink Table 3 16 Segment Display for
4. 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition In general the discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation is different from that under which the initial measurement is conducted at the time of factory shipment As a result the measured data for the DC link bus capacitor may not be updated A method is provided therefore that allows you to measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during an ordinary power off time by taking on assuming its discharging condition during a power off time under the ordinary operation condition at the end user s installation Presented below is the procedure for taking on the discharging condition during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capaci
5. PID feedback value Figure 3 8 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the A and V keys to display Drive Monitoring sa Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 7L Use the N and V keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the Gu key The running status information for the selected item appears Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the key again to return to the menu 3 17 Table 3 11 Drive Monitor Display Items LED monitor Item Unit Description shows Output frequency He Outputtrequency Outputfrequency Output current ze Output current ea Output voltage N i Outputvotage voltage eR Calculated Calculated output torque of the loaded motor in Torque Fe Reference fre Frequency specified by a frequency command a quency ri Rotational Rotational direction being outputted IU direction F forward reverse stop 3 n7 Running status N A Running status in hexadecimal format PE Refer to m Displaying running status on the next page 30 Motor speed r min Display value Output frequency Hz x 129 Sa Function c
6. 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to an
7. 3 4 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID process commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID process commands by using the N and Q keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed or speed by setting function code E48 E Setting up a frequency command Using the AN and Q keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 Enable N Q keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the WN Q key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 If you need to change the frequency command press the N Q key again The new setting will be auto matically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned on next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Tip The frequency command can be saved either automatically as mentioned above or by pressing the key You can choose either way using function code E64 e If you have set function code F01 to 0 Enable WIO keys on keypad but have selected a fre quency command other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multistep frequency command then the N Q keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency e Whe
8. Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Inverter output terminals U V W and grounding terminals G Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the 3 phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal G Note Note The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m when they are connected directly If the wiring length exceeds 50 m an output circuit filter option should be inserted E g total power cable length is 400 m as shown in the figure below Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors even if some possible combinations of inverters and motors are considered No Output Circuit Filter installed Output Circuit Filter installed Inverter 50 m or less 400 m or less Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter s output lines secondary circuit If the wiring length is long the stray capaci
9. Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 1 ROM version 1400 or later 99 99 ROM version earlier than 1400 65 53 2 ROM version 1400 or later 99 990 ROM version earlier than 1400 65 535 Crip The inverter s ROM version can be checked on Menu 5 Maintenance Information 5_ 4 3 25 Table 3 18 Continued LED Monitor Item Description shows i No of RS485 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS485 commu errors stan nication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned on dard Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of Shows the latest error that has occurred in standard RS485 communication in RS485 commu decimal format pee ni For error contents refer to the RS485 Communication User s Manual MEH448a standar No of option Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power is errors turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Inverter s ROM Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code T version Keypad s ROM Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code oe version No of RS485 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS485 commu errors option n
10. E codes Extension Terminal Functions Change Code Data setting range it when running E01 Command Assignment to Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding x1 function to terminals X1 to X5 as listed below Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown E02 X2 below assigns a negative logic input to a terminal E03 x3 0 oon t Select multistep frequency E04 X4 Enable 3 wire operation Coast to a stop Reset alarm Enable external alarm trip 11 1011 Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 13 Enable DC brake DCBRK 15 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 16 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz SW60 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable write from keypad Data changeable WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 22 1022 Interlock IL 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS485 or field bus option LE 25 1025 Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Select starting characteristics STM 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC 38 1038 Enable to run RE 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 41 Enable integ
11. WR Always 0 5 NUV 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands 1 during braking via communications link 1 when an alarm has occurred 3 INT 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 2 EXT 1 during DC braking o gt Ace 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction ie see 1 under current limiting control 0 FWD 1 during running in the forward direction Table 3 13 Running Status Display LED No LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 w _ s s a s w o e 7 s gt 2 o aa ae Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on the LED monitor E Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 14 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 14 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion l ney 3 19 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 15 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 9 SS y Programming mode i OF re List of I O check items I O data ON x By LED segment ON OFF f
12. e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO e Incase the standard keypad has been replaced with a multi function keypad after the purchase put back the original standard keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X5 of the control Circuit e Ifapotentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e Ifan external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 Y3 and relay output signals Y5A C and 30A B C will not be turned ON Note If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Chote If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor
13. lt lt amp N 1059 Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF CN t A mark in the Active OFF column means that a negative logic cannot be applied to the terminal function 5 53 E Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal is used to tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating inverter being stopped E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the allowable error zone prefixed to 2 5 Hz E Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency de tection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 To utilize this feature you need to assign FDT data 2 to any of digital output terminals E Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goe
14. 5 56 E Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation E Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms For details of the overload prevention control refer to the descriptions of function code H70 E Current detected ID Function code data 37 This output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms This signal goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but Note also for the operation level of the current detection ID For details of the current detection refer to the descriptions of function codes E34 and E35 HM Low output torque detected U TL Function code data 45 This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter decreases below the level specified by E80 Detect low torque Detection level for the time longer than the one specified by E81 Detect low torque Timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms For det
15. Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 gt Enable the auto resetting H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise EF Ground fault 90 kW or above Possible Causes The output terminal of the inverter is short circuited to the ground ground fault or earthed iin Overvoltage TUHI I A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wires from the output terminals U V and W and perform a megger test gt Remove the earthed path including the replacement of the wires the terminals or the motor as necessary The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage Lii Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration TU 1 Lini Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration TU 11 Lii Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 2 The power supply voltage was over the range of the inverter s specifications A surge current entered the input power source The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load The acceleration time was too short What to Check and Suggested Measures Measu
16. Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident Generally control signal wires are not enforced insulated If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In such a case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Otherwise an accident or electric shock could occur A CAUTION e Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Otherwise injuries could occur e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation A WARNING Be sure to install the terminal block cover and the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the covers while power is applied Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the retry function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor de pending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the sta
17. Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 3 Installation of EMC Compliant Filter Option 10 5 4 EMC compliant environment and class The table below lists the capacity and power supply voltage of the FRENIC Eco and the EMC compliant environment Power Inverter capacity supply Standards po trvertor capacity O voltage 0 75 to 90 kW 110 to 220 kW 3 phase Second environment Industrial environment 200 V Second environment Industrial environment 3 phase Second environment Industrial environment 400 V Category C2 Category C3 Note 1 Note 1 Wiring change for compliance Changing the internal wiring makes EMC compliant level emission be in conformity with Category C2 Refer to the wiring procedures given on the following pages A WARNINGA Before changing any internal wiring turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of 37 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 37 kW or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur 10 6 FRN110F1S 4C 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below Point
18. The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC Directives If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close of the power factor correcting capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 I
19. 2 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line 3 The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW 4 Requires a panel mount adapter option 10 4 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter This section shows how to install an EMC compliant filter In the footmount style mount the inverter on the EMC compliant filter In the split style mount the filter beside or under the inverter Note For the footmount style inverters with ratings of 400 V 5 5 kW and 15 kW require a panel mount adapter option as listed below Table 10 2 EMC compliant Filter and Panel mount Adapter option EMC filter model Panel mount adapter model 3 phase 400 V Inverter type Bundled screws to fix the filter onto Bundled screws to fix the adapter panel mount adapter onto inverter 5 5 kW FRN5 5F1S 40 EFL 7 5G11 4 MA F 1 5 5 Four M8 x 20 screws Four M5 x 15 screws 15 kW FRN15F1S 40 EFL 15G11 4 MA F1 15 Four M8 x 20 screws Four M8 x 25 screws Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination From power supply lines From power supply lines To motor To motor Shield grounding clamps A Footmount style B Split style Figure 10 2 Installing Inverter and EMC compliant Filter
20. 26 1026 Select starting characteristics STM 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC 38 1038 Enable to run RE 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 50 1050 Clear periodic switching time MCLR 51 1051 Enable pump drive motor 1 MEN1 52 1052 Enable pump drive motor 2 MEN2 53 1053 Enable pump drive motor 3 MEN3 54 1054 Enable pump drive motor 4 MEN4 87 1087 Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 88 Run forward 2 FWD2 89 Run reverse 2 REV2 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively C codes Control Functions of Frequency Incre range Code Data setting range Unit when ment j running C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 120 0 C02 2 C03 3 C04 Band 0 0 to 30 0 a C05 Multistep Frequency 1 0 00 to 120 00 1 0 01 C06 2 C07 3 C08 4 Cog C10 C11 C30 Frequency Command 2 Enable Q Q keys on keypad Y 2 5 22 Enable voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC Enable current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Enable sum of
21. A communications error occurred during RS485 communications What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no response error detection time be ignored y08 0 Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS485 relay converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable 6 17 Possible Causes 6 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter 23 amp Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter was unable to save data such as the frequency commands and PID process command set through the keypad when the power was switched off Possible Causes 1 3 The control circuit voltage dropped suddenly wh
22. C Llo Aux power input for AC fans Grounding terminal Grounding terminal aa Control circuit Alarm relay output for any fault Relay output Analog inputs Analog output Note 6 Digital output DCR DC Reactor ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker MC Magnetic Contactor MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker Digital inputs Transistor outputs Note 1 When connecting a DC reactor DCR first remove the short bar between terminals P1 and P A DCR is optional for inverters below 75 kW but standard for inverters of 75 kW or above For inverters of 75 kW or above be sure to connect a DCR To protect wiring insert a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power supply and the inverter Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity Note 3 In addition to an MCCB or ELCB insert if necessary a magnetic contactor MC of the type recommended for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter Furthermore if the coil of the MC or solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter install a surge absorber in parallel Note 4 To put the inverter on standby by making the control circuit only active with the main circuit power supply being opened connect this pair of wires to terminals R0 and T0 Without connecting this
23. Detection level E81 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 1 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 E code continued Code E98 Command Assignment to E99 Data setting range Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown below assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 0 1000 SS1 1 oon Select multistep frequency SS2 2 1002 SS4 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 11 1011 Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 13 Enable DC brake DCBRK 15 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 16 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz SW60 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable write from keypad Data changeable 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 22 1022 Interlock IL 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS485 or field bus option LE 25 1025 Universal DI U DI
24. P01 though PO3 and P06 though P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning per P04 e When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use automatic torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power consumption of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system The inverter enables this feature only upon constant speed operation During acceleration and deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or automatic torque boost depending on data of the function code F37 If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for a system that requires quick acceleration and deceleration N e Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base c ote frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes h
25. 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 P codes Motor Parameters Code P01 P02 P03 P04 P06 P07 P08 P99 Motor Selection Characteristics of motor 0 Change Refer Incre 2 Default Data setting range Unit when to ment f running page aie aa aes fed ai Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 where the data of function code P99 is 0 3 Rated or 4 capacity 0 01 to 1000 where the data of function code P99 is 1 of motor Rated current 0 00 to 2000 0 01 Rated 5 61 current of Fuji standard motor Auto tuning 0 Disable Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped and no load current while running Rated value of Fuji standard motor No load current 0 00 to 2000 0 01 A Y1 Y2 R1 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 Y Y1 Rated y2 value of Fuji standard motor Y Y1 Y2 TE Rated value of Fuji standard motor 0 00 to 50 00 a 5 62 Fuji standard motors 8 series Characteristics of motor 1 HP rated motors Characteristics of motor 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup H codes High Performance Functions Code H03 H04 HO5 HOG HO7 H09 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 H17 H26 H27 Data Initialization 0 1 2 Auto resetting 0 Data setting range Disable initialization Initialize
26. 1 Megger test of main circuit _ Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement NO If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the control wiring KR O Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7 2 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground terminal ol 5 MQ 1 MQ for the EMC filter built in type of inverters or a larger value displayed at the Megger indicates a correct state The value is for a discrete inverter Inverter L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 U P N Figure 7 2 Megger Test 2 Dielectric strength test of control circuit Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit Prepare a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground 1 MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied 7 6 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 I
27. 7 Same as above NG G OD Figure 3 11 Alarm Information Menu Transition 3 27 Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display Alarm Information 5 47 3 Press the Gm key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g 4 1 In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the N or Q key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recent one as Ea and 7 5 While the alarm code is displayed press the key to have the corresponding alarm item number e g 4_iiL and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of approximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g 5_ and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the A and V keys 6 Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 19 Alarm Information Displayed LED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No psmticnaldirmciod This shows the rotational direction being output fe Jae Banana Sais This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to
28. Allowable leakage Txos cumga at OEF asm FWD REV CM Figure 2 20 Digital Input Circuit OF SOURCE OFF eva REV Operation current at ON iC el O 3 Input voltage is at OV L PLC Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y3 Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more CM Digital Two common terminals for digital input signal terminals and output terminal FMP common These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY 2 26 Table 2 11 Continued Symbol Functions m Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 21 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Control Circuit gt lt Control Circuit gt 24 VDC 24 VDC a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 21 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact E Using a programmable logic controller PLC to
29. Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances E When mounting two or more inverters Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more inverters are to be installed in the same unit or enclosure If it is necessary to mount the inverters vertically install a partition plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any gap between them only for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 kW or below E When employing external cooling At the shipment time the inverter is set up for mount inside your equipment or enclosure so that cooling is done all internally To improve cooling efficiently you can take the heat sink out of the equipment or the enclosure as shown on the right so that cooling is done both internally and externally this is called external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the enclosure As a result much less heat is radiated inside the equipment or the enclosure To take advantage of external cooling you need to use the external cooling attachment option for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or below or simply re position the mounting bases for the cooling unit for inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above In an env
30. SERT g E Displaying running status in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the in verter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Cumulative run time When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued ee 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is Lid No of startups displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Temperature inside the Shows the temperature inside the inverter when an alarm occurs inverter Unit C Max temperature of heat Shows the temperature of the heat sink sink Unit C DC link bus voltage 3 28 Table 3 19 Continued LED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No Terminal I O signal status displayed wi
31. capacity res 0 98 me TN o SN o E H91 PID Feedback Wire Break 0 Disable 0 1 Y 5 74 Detection 5 0 1 to 60 0 Detection time H92 Continue to Run 0 000 to 10 000 999 1 0 001 Times Y1 P component gain Y2 H93 l component time 0 010 to 10 000 999 1 0 001 H94 Cumulative Run Time of Change or reset the cumulative data 5 75 Motor H95 DC Braking 0 Slow 5 40 Braking response mode 1 Quick Start check function H97 Clear Alarm Data Setting H97 data to 1 clears alarm data and then returns to zero H98 Protection 0 to 63 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in Maintenance Function decimal format In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function Bits 5 3 2 0 Lowerthe carrier frequency automatically Detect input phase loss Detect output phase loss Select life judgment criteria of DC link bus capacitor Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Detect DC fan lock When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 The H86 through H91 are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not acce
32. gt j O OLI be I O status in binary format eee Alto HUGS Input status in hex format OLWi OOG i Output status in hex format z g S N gt By LED segment ON OFF _ W O status in binary format APO HUGS Input status in hex format OOG Output status in hex format Xe D N S Sa Input voltage at terminal 12 V ap gt u r ct Ca 5 47 Output current at terminal FMA mA Figure 3 9 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking 3 20 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the N and V keys to display I O Checking 11 Press the Ge key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g _Zi Use the and V keys to display the desired I O check item then press the Guy key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item _ 7 or 4_Z using the N and V keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 16 and hexa decimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 17 5 Press the key
33. gt Set H26 PTC thermistor Input to 0 inactive 11 2 5 Fuse blown 90 kW or above Problem The fuse inside the inverter blew Possible Causes 1 The fuse blew because of a short circuiting inside the inverter 12 ASF Charger circuit fault What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from outside gt Take measures against surges and noise gt Have the inverter repaired 45 kW or above 200 V Series 55 kW or above 400 V Series Problem The magnetic contactor for short circuiting the resistor for charging failed to work Possible Causes 1 Control power was not supplied to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether in normal connection of the main circuit not connection via the DC link bus the connector CN on the power supply printed circuit board is not inserted to NC gt Insert the connector to FAN Check whether you have quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to confirm safety after cabling wiring gt Wait until the DC link bus voltage has dropped to a sufficiently low level and then reset the current alarm and turn ON the power again Do not turn the circuit breaker ON and OFF quickly Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit to the operation level lighting LEDs on the keypad in a short p
34. later no load current while No load current the motor is running At 50 of the Base frequency Upon completion of the tuning the primary resistance R1 will be automatically saved into PO7 the leakage reactance X into P08 and the no load current into PO6 4 2 3 Preparation of Machine System Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the safety device 4 Perform tuning Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the key The blinking of or z on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a Run command for the rotation direction you have chosen The factory default setting is forward rotation upon pressing the key on the keypad To switch to reverse rotation change the setting of function code F02 The display of or lt stays lit and tuning takes place while the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time approximately 40 s If the function code P04 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning takes place Upon completion of measurements the motor will coast to stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 10 s Deceleration time If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as the Run command F02 1 72 will appear upon completion of the measurements The Run command is turned OFF and the tuning completes with the next function code FiS displayed on the keypad the Run command given th
35. one inverter driven four commercial power driven e Cyclic motor driving mode Pumps under control three inverter commercial power driven In this mode a relay output card option OPC F1S RY is required Furthermore this control features a constantly periodic switching function an average time drive switching function a cumulative pump run time monitor a cumulative relay activating times monitor and so on Running stopping Speed monitor output current A output voltage V torque calculation value input power kW PID reference value PID feedback value PID output load factor motor output Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Output frequency Hz motor speed r min load shaft speed r min indication Lifetime early warning Shows the lifetime early warnings of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards An external output can the DC link bus capacitor and the cooling fan be issued in a transistor or relay output signal Cumulative run time Shows the cumulative running hours of the motor and inverter and the input watt hour Item Trip error code Explanation capa the cause of trip by codes Overcurrent during acceleration Remarks Overcurrent during deceleration ar Overcurrent during running at constant speed E Grounding fault L m Input phase loss E Li Undervoltage HPL Output phase loss Lis d Overvoltage durin
36. to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source slide switch on the printed circuit board is properly configured Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction FO2 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed FO2 2 or 3 Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command While referring to the block diagram of the drive command generator check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 1 0 Checking using the keypad Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command Check that a frequency command has been entered with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Set the value of the frequency command to the same or higher than that of the starting or stop frequency F23 or F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the frequency command signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connec
37. 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 2 0 7 5 5 5 10 20 86 5 63 400 V series motors shipped for Taiwan and Korea K and EU E cae aad Applicable Rated il ee motor rating 0 01 1008 022 n7 160 00 to 199 99 160 272 19 73 200 00 to 219 99 200 335 20 02 220 00 to 249 99 220 365 20 90 250 00 to 279 99 250 415 18 88 280 00 to 314 99 280 462 19 18 315 00 to 354 99 315 520 16 68 355 00 to 399 99 355 580 16 40 400 00 to 449 99 400 670 15 67 S 0 10 to 0 19 0 20 to 0 39 0 40 to 0 74 0 75 to 1 49 1 50 to 2 19 2 20 to 3 69 3 70 to 5 49 5 50 to 7 49 7 50 to 10 99 11 00 to 14 99 15 00 to 18 49 18 50 to 21 99 22 00 to 29 99 30 00 to 36 99 37 00 to 44 99 45 00 to 54 99 55 00 to 74 99 75 00 to 89 99 90 00 to 109 99 110 00 to 131 99 110 132 00 to 159 99 132 NNj oa oa N on P 450 00 to 529 99 450 530 00 or above 530 5 64 200 V series motors shipped for Asia A Applicable Rated current No maa al R kw motor rating Teea Cona are iwon s amesa a nese a7 Teme ss a oo os a oa O5 O5 Ca Oo Lae S 13 67 20 50 10 08 11 85 11 46 12 15 16 23 12 49 Ten 720 543 EEA 480 EA 373 2 lt BE EES 209 EES Oo oos oos 90 00 to 109 99 60 96 70 97 23 01 13 24 97 38 35 66 12 38 118 2 38 04 13 56 141 9 43 54 13 36 172 8 53 72 13 39 236 5 76 27 13 97 282 0 90 93 13 26 342 0 83 60 17 25 110 00
38. 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed 2 Warranty range 1 In the event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied b
39. 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned on the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the key to switch between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the key refer to Monitoring of Running Status in Figure 3 2 Transition between Basic Display Frames by Operation Mode Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Display l Sample on LED indicator l l Function Monitor Items the LED Eon Oof Unit Meaning of Displayed Value Code E43 monitor 1 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED Speed monitor Ae Output frequency SALL MHz OA OkW Frequency actually being output E48 0 ele 120 MHz BA Okw Output frequency x Pot E48 3 Load shaft speed Sit MHz BA Okw Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 Speed SGL OHz OA Okw Output current 34 OHz BA OkW A Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 cli OHz OA OkW Voltage output from the inverter in RMS ae Op Hz OA OkW Motor output torque in Calculated value Input power OHz OA mkWw Input power to the inverter PID process command weed PID process command feedback value 3 4 Oz OA OkW transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g Tem PID feedback value FATT perature 3 5 a OHz OA OkW Refer to the function codes E40 and E41 for details
40. 37 kW or above before starting inspection Further check that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 37 kW or above are unlit and that the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals is lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons e Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work e Use insulated tools Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Disposal ACAUTION e Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur Others AWARNING e Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Conformity with Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE can be considered to be compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC ACAUTION Be sure to earth the grounding terminal G Use an earth wire sized more than that of the power wires used in the power dispatch system Do not use a residual current operated protective device RCD or an earth leakage circuit breaker EL
41. 55 kW or above The connector configuration of the factory default is U1 for Asia Taiwan Korea EU Connector configuration 380 to 398 V 50 Hz 380 to 430 V 60 Hz 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz co Factory default for Asia Taiwan Korea EU source Note Allowable power input voltage range should be within 15 to 10 of power source voltage voltage Note Allowable power input voltage range should be within 15 to 10 of power source voltage E Setting up the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for the models of 200 V series 45 kW or above 400 V series 55 kW or above Connector configuration Power system operation When using no terminal R1 T1 Factory default When using the terminals R1 T1 e Feeding the DC linked power e Combined with a PWM converter Figure 2 16 Reconfiguration of the CN UX CN R and CN W Connectors 2 21 DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters Note Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit po
42. Bias F18 0 Analog input 0 1V 10 eon 100 Bias Gain Reference Reference Point C50 Point C34 5 39 F20 to F22 H95 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias reference point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V set the bias reference point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain reference point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V set the gain reference point to 50 C34 50 Note The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any refer ence points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc DC Braking Braking start frequency Braking level and Braking time DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents the motor from running by inertia during deceleration to stop operation If the motor enters a deceleration to stop operation by turning off the run command or by de creasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking start frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables t
43. Block c FRN220F1S 40 Note A box O in the above model names replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Figure 1 4 Terminal Blocks and Keypad Enclosure Location 1 3 Transportation e When carrying an inverter always support its bottom at the front and rear sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only You may drop the inverter or break it e When hoisting an inverter with hoisting holes hook or rope the 4 holes evenly 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage temperature 25 to 70 C A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt changes in Relative humidity 5 to 95 temperature that would result in the formation of condensation or ice Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa in storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation 1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature th
44. Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded Wire lt Control Circuit gt Gor Device N Capacitor lt Control Circuit gt Analog Output 0 022 u F 13 50V 12 12 11 11 Ferrite Core Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 18 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 19 Example of Electric Noise Reduction 2 25 Table 2 11 Continued Symbol Name Functions X1 Digital 1 The various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment and input 1 multistep frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 For details refer to X2 zi Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function Codes dia 2 Input mode i e Sink Source is changeable by using the internal slide switch X3 Digital 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between X1 to X5 FWD input 3 or REV and CM If the logic value for ON between X1 and CM is 1 in the normal x4 Digital logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa input 4 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for FWD and REV X5 Digital input 5 FWD Digital input circuit specifications lt Control Circuit gt ON level PLC Photocoupler voltage Digital input
45. External Signal Information omc l oe veo coo ce rev ec E l E fof e c D E dp d Oo o s e on a a No corresponding control circuit terminal exists 1 For the open close states of FWD REV X1 through X5 circuits refer to the setting of the SINK SOURCE slide switch in Chapter 2 Table 2 11 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page 3 22 e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 17 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits 4 to each With the FRENIC Eco digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to 0 when it is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are on short circuited and all the others are off open 4 4 5 is displayed on LED4 to LED1 For the open close states of FWD REV X1 through X5 circuits refer to the setting of the SINK SOURCE slide switch in Chapter 2 Table 2 11 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Ter
46. FWD or a run reverse command REV The motor did not start Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The voltage of the DC link Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming bus was low mode on the keypad and check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for 3 phase 200V and 400 VDC or below for 3 phase 400V gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 2 The main power is not ON Check that the main power is turned ON anehe Auxiliary impul gt If it is not ON turn it ON power to the control circuit is supplied 3 appears Problem Parentheses _ has appeared on the screen while the keypad displaying the Drive Monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The data to be displayed Check that the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient could not fit the LED E50 does not exceed 9999 monitor e g overflown gt Adjust the setting of E50 6 20 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time Take care of the following items during work A WARNINGA Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of 37 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models
47. Function y codes and Option Function o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 5 3 and subsequent pages E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is runnin Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when running Validating and saving function code data y Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with N and Q keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Y Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and V keys the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory m Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode
48. Function codes subject to initialization P01 P03 P06 P0O7 and P08 in cluding the internal control constants e To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 Motor Rated Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Capacity 2 P99 Motor Selection Select the characteristics of the motor Refer to the de scriptions given for P99 3 HO3 Data Initializing Initialize the motor parameters HO3 2 4 P03 Motor Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set Rated current data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor e Upon completion of the initialization the data of function code HO3 is reset to 0 default set ting e Ifa capacity other than that of applicable motor rating is set at PO2 the capacity will be in ternally converted to the applicable motor rating see the table on the following pages 5 62 E When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or other motors P99 4 are selected the motor parameters for P02 through P08 are as listed in following tables 200 V series motors shipped for Taiwan and Korea K Motor capacity Applicable he No load current R X kw motor rating A A kW re ren 230 1020 1366 1 360 230 a7 1076 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 15 0 7 67 5 79 11 25 5 28 14 31 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 68 3 25 16 37 16 58 16 00 2 3 14 96 3 16 41 4 16 16 5 16 20 7 16 89 16 03 0 0
49. L3 T Inverter type A Inverter s grounding SG W W o W W o DCR DCR DCR DCR Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor kW Inverter outputs U V W DC reactor P1 P Aux control power supply RO TO Aux fan power supply R1 T1 T 2 FRN45F1S 20 FRN55F1S 20 350 FRN3 7F1S 40 FRN4 0F1S 4E Three phase 200 V FRN5 5F1S 40 FRN7 5F1S 40 20 75 Three phase 400 V feo FRN90F1540 200 0 250 160 360 Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600V PVC wires used at an ambient temperature of 40 C The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW 2 3 vii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below ACAUTION Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes 1 Solid state motor ov
50. M48 4 pes Three phase 400 V FRNTG2F 15 40 fo FRNI60F1S A Max 4 pes Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Front Cover Fastening Screws Figure 2 8 Removing the Front Cover FRN37F1S 20 A box L replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 2 8 3 For inverters with a capacity of 200 kW to 220 kW E Removing and mounting the covers To remove the lower front cover loosen the five fastening screws on it and hold it with both hands and then slide it upward K Note You can do wiring works just removing the lower front cover To remove the upper front cover loosen the five screws on it while supporting it with a hand Pull and remove it with both hands Refer to Figure 2 9 Put back the upper and lower front covers in reverse order of and Make sure to properly match the position of the screw holes on the upper and lower front covers and inverter case Upper Front Cover Fastening Screws M5x8 Lower Front Cover Wire to from the inverter after removing the lower front cover Fastening Screws M5x8 Upper Front Cover The upper front cover is removable as well as shown above Tightening torque 3 5 Nem Figure 2 9 Removing the Front Covers FRN220F1S 4 1 A box L replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 2 3 2 Removing and mounting
51. No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON For details of switching refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function 5 50 WE Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS485 communications link or a field bus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the in verter For an access to universal DI via the RS485 or field bus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals HM Select starting characteristics STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it For details of auto search for idling motor speed refer to HO9 and H17 Select starting characteristics E Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop during the time specified by H56 Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with alarm 4 Apply this command to a failsafe facility E Select local keypad operation LOC Function code data 35 This terminal command switches the source of the run command and frequency command be tween remot
52. ON power and checking A WARNING Be sure to install the covers for both the main circuit terminal block control circuit terminal block and the front cover if any before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on e Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory setting nnn aA ea 1 Check if the LED monitor displays 74 means that the UU Ue frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 Lemin lemin If the LED monitor displays numbers except 7 then press A keys to set 7 77 as the frequency command 2 Check if a built in cooling fan rotates When only the auxiliary power is fed while the main power is turned OFF the cooling fan does not rotate For the o NE SERED inverter of 1 5 kW or below no cooling fan is mounted Figure 4 2 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Before starting running the motor set function code data specified in Table 4 1 to the motor ratings and your system design values For the motor check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 1 Setting up fu
53. PID 1 to 120 Hz process output 999 Depends on setting of F15 J19 Lower limit of PID 1 to 120 process output 999 Depends on setting of F16 J21 Dew Condensation 1 to 50 Prevention Duty J22 Commercial Power 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm Y Switching Sequence 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 Boor BQN O J code continued i Change Code Name Data setting range nit when 0 Disable Enable Fixed inverter driven Enable Floating inverter driven J25 Pump Control Mode selection J26 Motor 1 Mode Disable Always OFF Enable Force to run by commercial power J28 Motor 3 Mode J29 Motor 4 Mode J30 Motor Switching Order Fixed Automatically Constant run time J31 Motor Stop Mode 0 Stop all motors inverter and commercial power driven 1 Stop inverter driven motor only excl alarm state 2 Stop inverter driven motor only incl alarm state J32 Periodic Switching Time 0 0 Disable switching for Motor Drive 0 1 to 720 0 Switching time range 999 Fix to 3 minutes J33 Periodic Switching 0
54. PO6 PO7 and P08 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Set P02 P03 and PO6 properly and perform auto tuning in accordance with P04 Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter level gt If the current limiting operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then turn the power OFF and back on again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 and H51 to ensure that the V f pattern is right gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring has been connected to the motor incorrectly 2 Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV 3 The setting for the rotation direction via keypad operation is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the respective U V and W terminals of the motor Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function co
55. Q keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 9 PID Frequency Command Generator for details on the PID control Setting the PID process command with the Q and Q keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 Enable N V keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the N Q key To enable the PID process command to be modified with the N X key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the WIO key to have the PID process command displayed The lowest digit will blink on the LED monitor 4 To change the PID process command press the WIO key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is kept there even if you temporarily switch to another means of specifying the PID process command and then go back to the means of specifying the PID process command via the keypad Also it is kept there even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered on Tip Even if multistep frequency is selected as the PID process command SS4 ON you still can set the process command using the keypad e When function code J
56. RS485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON SW5 Switches property of the analog input terminal V2 for V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code H26 Analog frequency command in voltage V2 Factory default SW4 Switches the output mode of the analog output terminal FMA between voltage and current When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 Voltage output Factory default 2 32 E Opening and closing the control circuit terminal symbol plate for the screw terminal base The symbolic names of the control circuit terminals are marked on the control circuit terminal symbol plate provided on the top of the terminal block The plate can be opened or closed as necessary Follow the procedures illustrated below to open or close the plate e Opening the plate Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate Handle Using the handle pull the plate toward you Put the plate upright Figure 2 27 Opening the Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate e Closing the plate Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate Handle Using the handle turn
57. V series 45 kW or above 400 V series 55 kW or above Inverter Unit P1 P N L1 RO U L2 S V L3 T W R Tre ee DC linked power input configuration PWM converter linked configuration Figure 2 13 Switching Fan Power Source 2 19 E Setting up the jumpers for the connectors CN UX CN R and CN W These switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB mounted at the right hand side of the control printed circuit board control PCB as shown below Switching Connectors for Power Input CN UX Switching Connectors for Fans CN R CN W Ve ee allel E _ E E ee no A I YOL Y3 i OL V2 LEMA LE IP eS 7 TF mr 4D SEB rab aD aD EDC a CONE aD Pe ae 2 Auxiliary Power Input Terminals for Control Circuit Figure 2 14 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals Note To remove the jumper pinch its upper side between your fingers unlock its fastener and pull CN UX it up To insert it pull it down as firmly as it locks with the connector until you will have heard a click sound CN R CN W Figure 2 15 Inserting Removing the Jumpers 2 20 Figure 2 16 shown below illustrates how the configuration jumpers of the connectors CN UX CN R and CN W are setup by factory defaults and to change their settings for a new power configuration E Setting up the power switching connector CN UX for the models of 400 V series
58. View and Terminal Blocks 1 2 1 3 RFANSPOMALION siistessccu ses sasuees Lentacictetatdtend inten 1 4 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 4 1 Temporary storage cccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 4 1 4 2 Long term Storage cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 1 4 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THEINVERTER sf cesice i lol fol ial 2 1 2 1 Operating Environment 2 1 2 2 Installing the Inverter cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 Dd AATAS EEE cache Nate isd eet ceed eehegeed mbucnetiehie dy ad at 2 6 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover 2 6 2 3 2 Removing and mounting the cable guide plate for models of 0 75 kW to 22 kW 2 10 2 3 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw speci fications use eee eae 2 11 2 3 4 Recommended wire sizes eee 2 14 2 3 5 Wiring precautions eee ee eeeeeees 2 15 2 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 23 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate 2 32 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 34 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection cosets drconnrartacs cost eucdeues cous 2 34 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps eee 2 35 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Curr
59. With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually For details of how to set up or edit function codes refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE Note KEYPAD LU Ifyou are using the multi function keypad option refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual INR SI47 0890 E for details 5 1 E Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An ON active signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the
60. a Run command being inputted any of the following operations has been performed Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 To reset the alarm turn the Run command OFF Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period H96 gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E05 on terminals X1 through X5 6 16 21 amp 7 Tuning error Problem Possible Causes 1 5 A phase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor Auto tuning failed What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter Check whether the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 P02 and P03 agrees with the specifications of the motor Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the motor is not exceeding 50m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the invert
61. according to the power source voltage and frequency Set the jumper to U1 or U2 depending upon the power source voltage applied to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or auxiliary power input terminals R1 T1 for fans as shown in Figure 2 16 2 18 E Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for models of 45 kW or above 200 V series or 55 kW or above 400 V series The standard FRENIC Eco series of inverters also accept DC linked power input in combination with a power regenerative PWM converter RHC series Even when you drive the inverter with a DC linked power however you also need to supply AC power for models of 45 kW or above 200 V series or 55 kW or above 400 V series since it contains components such as AC fans that are driven by AC power In this case reinstall the connectors CN R and CN W to the and positions respectively and supply the power to the auxiliary power input terminals R1 T1 For the actual procedure refer to Figures 2 14 to 2 16 below On the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W the jumpers are installed Note es l at and positions respectively by factory default Do not relocate the jumper unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply If there is a mistake in the installation of the jumpers for the switching connectors the cooling fan will not run causing a heat sink overheating alarm i4 or a charger circuit error alarm Fi 200
62. amplitude Within 2 to 9 Hz 9 8 m s Within 9 to 20 Hz 2 m s Within 20 to 55 Hz 1 m s Within 55 to 200 Hz Storage ambient temperature 25 to 70 C Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed External dimension Refer to Section 8 5 3 Keypad Mass 55 grams Note When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 1000 m to 3000 m you need to lower the output current of the inverter For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad No of linkable unit Table 8 2 Hardware specifications Specification One to one connection with an inverter Remarks For a remote site operation Link cable US ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type Extension cable for the remote site operation CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S and etc Maximum cable length 20m Connector Pin number Standard RJ 45 connector jack Table 8 3 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Connector Description Refer to Table 8 3 Remarks 1 and 8 Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC 2 and 7 Grounding lines 0 V to the ground 3 and 6 Reserved 4 RS485 communications data line 5 RS485 communications data line 8 4 8 2 3 Data transmission specifications Table 8 4 Data Transmission Specificatio
63. and H97 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms currently occurred 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Eco features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to set function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters the Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 6 Protective Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Setting of function codes Run Stop of motor Monitor of running status Monitor of running status I O signal states and maintenance info ra r 1 Oe ee Occurrence N r yt ofanalarm r r SO 7 Press this key if an alarm has occurred Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Figure 3 2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode the transition between menu items in Programming mode and the t
64. and Q keys to display 7 3 Press the key to proceed to a list of function codes 4 Use the N and Q keys to display the desired function code 7 in this example then press the key The data of this function code appears In this example data of appears 5 Change the function code data using the and V keys In this example press the key two times to change data to Z 6 Press the key to establish the function code data The SHLi appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the mc function code list then move to the next function code In this example Liz Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list Tip Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Power ON Running mode List of function codes Function code data 7 A E Sg rogramming mode Y i Poa JA TnT amu f Save data and go to the next function code yo Figur
65. either continuing the inverter operation or entering into alarm state Entering alarm state The inverter issues the alarm 7 and coasts to stop the motor Continuing operation The inverter does not enter the alarm mode and continues operation of the motor Note that however the inverter turns on OH and LIFE signals on the transistor output ter minals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless your selection If ON OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled HO6 1 the cooling fan may stop depending on operating condition of the inverter In this case the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal e g the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command so that the inverter may turn off the LIFE or OH signal output or enable to cancel the 4 alarm even if the internal air circulation DC fan is locked due to a failure etc When you start the inverter in this state it automatically issues the run fan com mand then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state and turn on the LIFE or OH output or enters the i alarm state Note Note that operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked for long time may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the control PCB due to local high temperature inside the inverter Be sure to check with the LIFE signal etc and replace the broken fan as soon as possible To set data of the function code H98 assign functions t
66. enclosure viewed from A 8 16 8 6 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from an During Yes protection overcurrent resulting from overload acceleration Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from protection overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit During deceleration Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from protection overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This During running at 7 protection is effective only during startup of the inverter If you constant speed turn ON the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Applicable to inverters of 75 kW or below 3 phase 200 V or 220 kW or below 3 phase 400 V Upon detection of zero phase current in the output power this Yes function stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit Applicable to inverters of 90 kW or above 3 phase 200 V or 280 kW or above 3 phase 400 V Overvoltage The inverter stops the inverter output upon detection of an During Yes protection overvoltage condition 400 VDC for 3 phase 200V 800 VDC acceleration for 3 phase 400V series in the DC link bus mn i During LILIT This protection is not assured if extremely large AC line deceleration v
67. enough to be recognized as a power failure In such an event restart after a recovery from mo mentary power failure does not work properly as designed To solve this connect the interlock command IL line to the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power has been recovered the inverter is restarted at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original fre quency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be en abled H12 1 Power Failure Recovery F14 4 V V DC Link Undervoltage Bus Voltage aa Searching for Motor Speed Output Frequency Motor Speed Acceleration Auto restarting after Momentary Power Failure IPF 5 35 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is recovered within the specified duration the inverter restarts in
68. frequency operation For inverter driven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors 1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below lists the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 i fb Base Frequency where If it exceeds 60 Hz fb 60 Hz Output Frequency 0 f2 f3 fp fo Hz Cooling Characteristics of Motor Equipped with a Self cooling Fan 5 30 Applicable Motor Rating and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor selection 0 or 4 Switching frequency for motor characteris tic factor Output current for setting the thermal time constant Characteristic factor Applicable Thermal time pp motor rating constant t i Qa a Qa 7 Hz 5 min 0 4 Base fre Base x 33 x 83 pes os oo Applicable Motor Rating and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor selection 1 or 3 Switching frequency for motor charac teristic factor Output current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Characteristic factor Applicable Thermal time motor rating constant t kW Factory defaul
69. in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination S crews S crews Cooling Fan Cooling Fans AA As P Figure A Figure B Figure 2 4 Fixing the Cooling Fan s 2 5 E Fixing the keypad for models of 30 kW or below M Remove the terminal block TB cover and the front cover For the procedure refer to 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover To fix the front cover and keypad hold the front cover and the keypad together and tighten the two attached screws provided as accessories from the back of the keypad Attached Screws M3 x 12 Backside of Front Cover Tightening torque 0 7 Nem Figure 2 5 Fixing the Keypad 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover 1 For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or below E Removing the covers To remove the terminal block TB cover first loosen the TB cover fastening screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal block TB cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the front cover hold it with both hands slide it downward to unlatch Tilt the front cover toward you and pull it upward Cover TB Cover Fastening Screw PULL Mark Fig
70. information Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes CNote When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time E Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data Figure 3 13 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Programming mode Alarm occurs Item Switchin Output frequency g at approx Current alarm code E EA 1 second intervals Pa D_i lt gt nai Eg GLi 2 Item Switching at approx Output current Va gt A 1 second intervals gi ear tet ii wm TO Item 1 second intervals H LI or a Switching at approx Error sub code A S Latest alarm code Same as above Yooo O aD E g 1 LILIT lt Same as above N a D H v 3 Q 2 D D D B N wv Same as above i Eg 30H49 lt List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an
71. make sure that no alarm occurs Ws i Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 0 1 07 5 11037 45 to 110 132 to 160 2 0 200 to 280 315 to 355 400 to 500 No Function code H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time also applies to the switching operation between line and inverter refer to E01 through E05 terminals X1 through X5 5 37 E Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the motor rotation cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the motor rotation ac cording to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action on the frequency fall rate Follow the deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in current limiter The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the Note motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output fre quency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering th
72. motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not per mitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock J CAUTION e Do not turn the main circuit power circuit breaker ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur Setting control switches A WARNING e Before setting up any internal control switches turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of 37 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 37 kW or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement A WARNINGA e Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of
73. or lower the carrier frequency Function code F26 e If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Consider any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect an output circuit filter option to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect a DC reactor option to terminals P1 and P C Note The wiring length should be 10 m or below e Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor is not going to be used e An inverter with a capacity of 75 kW or above is equipped with a DC reactor as standard Be sure to connect the DC reactor except when an optional converter is connected to the inverter Switching connectors m Power switching connectors CN UX for the models of 400 V series 55 kW or above An inverter of 400 V series 55 kW or above is equipped with a set of switching connectors CU UX male which should be configured with a jumper
74. output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage at high frequencies to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power 5 24 E Base Frequency F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the automatic torque boost settings automatic energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor E Non linear V f Pattern for Frequency H50 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 disables the non linear V f pattern operation E Non linear V f Pattern for Voltage H51 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern K Note If the rated voltage at base frequency F05 is set to 0 settings of function codes H50 and H51 will be ignored If the auto torque boost F37 is enabled H50 and
75. setting function code E20 E21 and E22 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function Codes for details 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 to Y3 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y3 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor Transistor output circuit specification output 2 lt Control Circuit gt i D OFF level 1 to 35 V Maximum load current 50 mA reer hae Leakage current at OFF Transistor Figure 2 24 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC output 3 3 Figure 2 23 Transistor Output Circuit C Note When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case wy Q J O O Par 2 12 Cc e Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s common Gi E Connecting Programmable Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 Y2 or Y3 Figure 2 24 shows two examples of circuit connection between the trans
76. starting frequency F23 Note If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as long as the frequency command does not exceed the stop frequency Output Frequency Starting Frequency F23 Nice fe Stop Frequency F25 Time Out of Running Inverter Out of Running Running State Gate OFF In Running Gate ON Gate OFF F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency F27 Motor Sound Tone E Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings 5 41 F29 F30 F31 Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ripples many harmonics components As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current Note When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overheat alarm TUH 11I Lior inverter o
77. straight type cable compliant to US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer SANWA Supply Co LTD Model KB 10T5 01K 1m KB STP 01K 1m Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive Note 2 When mounting on an enclosure wall use the screws fitted to the thickness of the wall Refer to Figure 2 34 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps HM Mounting a keypad on the enclosure wall Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hook pointed to by the arrow in Figure 2 32 Figure 2 32 Removing a Keypad Separate the keypad from the dummy cover by sliding them in the arrowed directions as shown in Figure 2 33 below Dummy Cover Figure 2 33 Separation of the Dummy Cover 2 35 Make a cut out on the enclosure wall For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 3 Keypad To mount the keypad on the enclosure wall fix it firmly using a pair of M3 screws put through the taps shown below Figure 2 34 Tightening torque 0 7N m RJ 45 Connector Enclosure Screw Tap M3x12 to be prepared by customer Screw Tap Backside of Keypad Figure 2 34 Mounting a Keypad on the Enclosure Wall Connect an extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S or off the shelf straight LAN cable to RJ 45 connectors Modular jacks on the keypad and inverter s
78. temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The standard humidity vibration and atmosphere measure using specification must be dust gas oil mist or water drops apparatus satisfied 2 Check if tools or other foreign matter 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or or dangerous objects are left around dangerous objects the equipment are left Voltage Check if the voltages of the main and Measure the voltages The standard control circuit are correct using a multimeter or specification must be the like satisfied 1 Check if the display is clear 1 2 1 2 2 Check if there is missing parts in the Visual inspection The display can be characters read and there is no fault 7 1 Table 7 1 Continued Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria 1 Abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Loosen bolts tightened parts 3 Deformation and breakage 4 Discoloration and deformation caused by overheat 5 Check for foulness and dust Structure such as frame and cover Common 1 Check if bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for foulness and dust 1 Check the conductor for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the cable for cracks and discoloration Conductor and wire Filtering capacitor Check for electrolyte lea
79. the plate down toward you and push it inward Hs TE N Figure 2 28 Closing the Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate 2 33 Figure 2 29 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example SW3 RS485 comm port terminator ON OFF OFF Control Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 29 Location of the Slide Switches 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 1 Mounting style You can mount a keypad in any style described below E Mounting a keypad on the enclosure wall Refer to Figure 2 30 E Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Refer to Figure 2 31 Enclosure a Keypad Inverter Inverter Remote Operation Screws for fixing Remote Operation Extension Cable Keypad Extension Cable Figure 2 30 Mounting Keypad on the Enclosure Wall Figure 2 31 Installing Keypad at a Remote Site e g for Operation on Hand 2 34 2 Parts needed for connection To mount install a keypad on a place other than an inverter parts listed below are needed Extension abie Note 1 CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 cables available in length of 5m 3m and 1m Fastening screw M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed Purchase off the shelf ones separately Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX
80. the key to return to the data copying function list Press the key again to return to the menu 3 30 E Data protection You can protect data saved in the keypad from unexpected modifications Enabling the data protection that was disabled changes the display on the Data copying function list to and disables to read data from the inverter To enable or disable the data protection follow the next steps 1 Select the data copy F In the Program mode menu 2 Holding the key down for 5 seconds or more alternates data protection status between enabled or disabled e Disabling the enabled Data protection While running the Data copying 4 function holding the os key down for 5 seconds displays 7E after appearing 7 temporarily to complete disabling the Data protection e Enabling the disabled Data protection ccs Hold key down for 5 seconds gt While running the Data copying 5 function holding the g key down for 5 seconds displays F a after appearing Aiv temporarily to complete disabling the Data protection Table 3 20 below lists details of the Data copying function 3 31 Table 3 20 List of Data Copying Functions Display on ae II Read data Reads the function code data out of the inverter s memory and stores it into the keypad memory Pressing the key during a read operation i blinking immediately aborts the o
81. the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level 5 31 Example of Operating Characteristics F12 0 5 200 eee ee E 1 nan i 2 ball ae ee ee ee ee i a ee es ee ee ee ee ee ee uiw JOJOYWY JO Stuy BuIA 150 100 00 Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 5 32 F14 H13 H14 H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Restart time Frequency fall rate Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after a recov ery from power failure 3 Enable restart Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for gen eral loads Enable Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the under voltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output of the inverter is shut down with undervoltage alarm issued and the motor enters a coast to stop state As soon as the DC l
82. the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is recovered after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power Failure Recovery Y f DC Link Bus Voltage I ee f Undervoltage Level Time Reserved to Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s i lt t No Power i I State of the Inverter Gate Signal oN Ready to Run Run Command ON ON Operation Case 1 3 Restart Run Command Operation Case 2 ON Cc F116 ON 4 Start of Normal Running If you set the allowable momentary power failure time H16 to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure as shown below If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure Power supply Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure 400 V series 100 V The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of K Note sy undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other fact
83. to return to a list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu KR O N _ S Sr Table 3 15 I O Check Items shows I O signals on the control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to circuit terminals E Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state for the digital I O terminals that received a I O signals on the control command via RS485 and optional communications Refer to circuit terminals under E Displaying control I O signal terminals and E Displaying communication control control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V 5 A tid Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA 5 za LH Output voltage to analog Shows the output voltage on terminal FMA in volts V meters FMA of ES Output voltage to digital me Shows the output voltage on terminal FMP in volts V ters FMP ie Pulse rate of FMP Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FMP in p s pulses per second Input voltage on terminal V2 Shows the input voltage on terminal V2 in volts V TANT Output current to analog Shows the output current on terminal FMA in mA meters FMA oy A Output current to analog Shows the output current on terminal FMI in mA meters FMI
84. voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Enable voltage input to terminal V2 ne to 10 VDC Enable terminal command UP DOWN control C32 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 1 0 01 100 0 5 39 for 12 lt lt C33 Filter time re eee aooo 0 00 to 5 00 See 5 60 C34 Gain reference point 000010000 00 to 100 00 1 Poor or ee 100 0 5 39 C37 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 1 0 01 100 0 for C1 lt C38 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 SY a S 00 to 5 00 ooa s y y o 0 05 5 60 C39 Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 1 e 100 0 5 39 C42 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 1 0 01 100 0 for V2 2 nl C43 Filter time rr ooo 0 00 to 5 00 Foot s y y 005 5 60 C44 Gain reference point 0 00t0100 00 0 00 to 100 00 1 ae ee 100 0 5 39 C50 Bias Reference Point 0 00 to 100 0 1 0 01 Frequency command 1 C51 Bias for PID command 1 100 0 to 100 00 1 0 01 Bias value C52 Bias reference point 0 00 to 100 00 1 CIRDEAN C53 Selection of Normal 0 Normal operation Inverse Operation 1 Inverse operation Frequency command 1 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to
85. voltage of the train can be used to drive an analog meter The output pulse can be specified for each of monitored data items To use this terminal for pulse output set F33 to an appropriate value and set F34 to 0 To use this terminal for fixed rate pulse train output set F34 within the range from 1 to 200 This setting causes the setting of F33 to be ignored E Pulse rate F33 F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the set monitored item reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected E Duty F34 Data for F34 FMP output Pulse duty Connected equipment Example 0 Pulse train Around 80 1 to 200 oe rate pulse 2000 p s Analog meter rain F34 allows you to scale the average voltage corresponding to full scale of the monitored item selected by function code F35 within the range of 1 to 200 where 100 stands on a half cycle of a square wave pulse in the train Out of Full Scalel F34 200 Pulse train output waveform ipo es ee 1 F34 100 Average Voltage 2 of Pulse Train Output 15 3 to 16 6 V ST Ein f 0 1 vmax EENE A Y A EEE ERSS LAE eee Sty F34 50 FMP output circuit O E o Gi 6 0 50 100 Meter Scale Meters eM For the voltage specifications of the pulse output refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 5 44 E01 to E05 E98 E99 E Function F35 F35 selects the
86. when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON M Select multistep frequency 1 to 7 steps SS1 SS2 and SS4 Function code data 0 1 and 2 The combination of ON OFF states of digital input signals SS1 SS2 and SS4 selects one of eight different frequency commands defined beforehand by seven function codes C05 to C11 Multistep frequency 1 to 7 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 8 different preset speeds The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 and SS4 In the Selected frequency column Other than multistep frequency repre sents the reference frequency commanded by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others Terminal Kal Terminal pa Terminal X1 e E03 e E02 Function co Function co Function code E01 Selected frequency OFF OFF OFF Other than multistep frequency OFF OFF CO5 Multistep frequency 1 OFF C06 Multistep frequency 2 OFF oe ee ee C07 Multistep frequency 3 OFF OFF CO8 Multistep frequency 4 EEE Eo M Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire operation Turning HLD ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning H
87. with AVR function Rated current A 139 168 203 240 290 360 415 1 520 585 650 740 Overload capability 120 of rated current for 1 min Rated frequency 50 60 Hz o D 2 5 a Main power supply Three phase 380 to 440 V 50 Hz or Three phase 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Phases Auxiliary control Single phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz voltage power input frequency auxiliary fan Single phase 380 to 440 V 50 Hz power input 5 Single phase 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Voltage frequency allowance Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 9 Frequency 5 to 5 Rated with DCR 138 164 201 238 286 357 390 500 559 628 705 current A 6 without DCR S J Joe 114 140 165 199 248 274 347 388 435 489 Torque 8 10 to 15 DC braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 60 DC reactor DCR Standard Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Applying Enclosure IEC60529 IPOO UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Mass kg s 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fuji 4 pole standard motor Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V for three phase 400 V series Output voltage cannot exceed the power su
88. 0 Menu Transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 KR O N _ S S Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Freie Use the N and V keys to display Maintenance Information 5 44 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ Li Use the N and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears Press the key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the zs key again to return to the menu 3 24 Table 3 18 Display Items for Maintenance Information LED Monitor ar Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter time Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again cont DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit 5 voltage Unit V volts Max tempe
89. 01 Y Y 0 1 Signaling Period 0 00 to 600 00 J34 Mount of Commercial 0 to 120 1 Hz Y Y Power driven Motor 999 Depends on setting of J18 Frequency This code is used to judge whether or not to mount a commercial power driven motor by checking the output frequency of the inverter driven motor i eure nooo e o e e J36 Unmount of Commercial 0 to 120 Power driven Motor 999 Depends on setting of J19 Frequency This code is used to judge whether or not to unmount a commercial power driven motor by checking the output a eee of the inverter driven motor a Ses E E J38 Contactor Contactor Delay Time Time 0 011020 01 to 2 00 ele J39 Switching Time for Motor Variable Mount Decl time 0 00 Depends on the setting of F08 0 01 to 3600 J40 Switching Time for Motor Variable Unmount Accl time 0 00 Depends on the setting of F07 0 01 to 3600 J41 Motor Mount Unmount 1 Y Y Switching Level 0 to 100 J42 Switching Motor Mount 0 0 Disable 0 1 Y Y Unmount Dead band 94 to 50 0 J code continued Code J43 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 J51 J52 J53 J54 J55 PID Control Startup Frequency Signal Assignment to For relay output card Y1A B C Y2A B C Y3A B C Cumulative Run Time of Motor Motor 0 Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 Maximum Cumulative Number of Relay ON Times Y1A B C to Y3A B C Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5A 30A B C Change D
90. 02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the WIO key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting e On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback value is displayed Table 3 4 PID Process Command Manually Set with the Q Q Key and Requirements Bip Gonto D Control Multistep Selection o an Monitor Frequency With the N Q key J01 SS4 J02 PID process command by keypad 1or2 O Other than 0 ON or OFF p Other than 0 PID process command currently selected 3 6 Setting up the frequency command with the and Q keys under PID control When function code F01 is set to 0 Enable N Q keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command that is disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multistep frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the W keys In Programming or Alarm mode the WIO keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command entered via the keypad is translated to the final
91. 06 is enabled but the fan does not run The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitor TW on the printed circuit board 5_ 7 4 above When the total time exceeds 99 990 2 hours the count stops and the display re mains at 99 99 1 Number of Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e startups the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 Input watt hour Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is data 0 000 to 9999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999
92. 10 5 The EMC compliant filter and the inverter should be connected with each other according to the procedure given below The wiring on the inverter and motor should be performed by an authorized electrical engineer In order to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive this procedure should be followed as closely as possible E Basic connection procedure 1 Install the inverter and the EMC compliant filter on a grounded metal plate Use a shielded cable also for connection to the motor and make it as short as possible Connect the shield layer of the cable firmly to the metal plate Also at the motor side connect the shield layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 Use a shielded cable for connection of control circuit lines of the inverter and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS485 communications card As with the motor clamp the shield layer of the cable firmly to a grounded plate 3 If noise radiated from the inverter exceeds the level prescribed in the EMC Directive enclose the inverter and its peripherals EMC compliant filter inside a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 3 Note Connect the shield layer of the cable electrically to the metal enclosure and the motor and make sure that both the metal enclosure and the Metal enclosure Power FRENIC Eco motor are grounded supply t gt L O Ree L1 R U EMC O compliant L2 S V filter optional Three phase
93. 12 Use an external thermal relay Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration deceleration This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 and F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the enclosure well Check the setting of FO9 torque boost and make sure that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall gt Adjust the setting of FO9 Recalculate the required acceleration deceleration torque and time from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 and F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload protection control H70 Check if there is sufficient clearance around
94. 120 Hz 0 01 Hz fixed Control method V f control Voltage freq characteristic Non linear V f setting Torque boost Load selection Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output frequency Ne 200 V o common spec AVR control can be turned ON or OFF Three phase 400 V 160 to 500 V 1 point Arbitrary voltage and frequency can be set Three phase 200 V 0 to 240 V 0 to 120 Hz Three phase 400 V 0 to 500 V 0 to 120 Hz Torque boost can be set with the function code F09 Set when O 1 3 or 4 is selected at F37 Select application load type with the function code F37 0 Variable torque load 1 Variable torque load for high starting torque 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation variable torque load in acceleration deceleration 4 Auto energy saving operation variable torque load for high starting torque for acceleration deceleration 5 Auto energy saving operation auto torque boost in acceleration deceleration Starting torque 50 or over Start stop Control Frequency command source Acceleration deceleration time Start FWD REV and stop with and stp keys Keypad standard Multifunction keypad Start and stop with or re and keys option External signals 7 digital inputs Forward reverse rotation stop command capable of 3 wire operation second operation command coast to stop command external alarm alarm reset etc Li
95. 2 Smelling and visual Visual inspection Hearing inspection abnormalities 1 Retighten 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities inspection 3 4 Visual inspection 1 Hearing and visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection No abnormalities If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum cleaner 7 2 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals When the replacement is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative Note The standard replacement interval differs by inverter s ROM version as listed below Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Standard replacement intervals Note Part name ROM version earlier than 1400 ROM version 1400 or later DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on the printed 7 years 10 years circuit boards 7 years 5 5 kW or below 10 years 5 5 kW or below Cooling fan 4 5 years 7 5 to 30 kW 10 years 7 5 to 30 kW 3 years 37 kW or above 7 years 37 kW or above Fuse 10 years 90 kW or above 10 years 90 kW or above Note These replacement intervals are based on the estimated service life of the inverte
96. 4 59 Overload capability 120 of rated current for 1 min Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Output ratings 380 10 440 VISO H Main power supply Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Thies anaes Phases 380 to 480 V 60 Hz voltage 7 Single phase frequency Auxiliary control Single phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz 380 to 440 V 50 Hz power input i i Single phase 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Auxiliary fan l 10 power input None Voltage frequency allowance Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 11 Frequency 5 to 5 Rated with DCR 16 30 45 75 10 6 14 4 21 1 28 8 35 5 42 2 57 0 68 5 83 2 current A 6 without DCR 3 1 59 8 2 13 0 17 3 23 2 33 0 43 8 523 60 6 77 9 94 3 114 Soy eae im 7 1 2 2 2 3 1 53 7 4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 a D c 7 5 a i Torque 8 20 10 to 15 DC braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 60 DC reactor DCR Option Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Applying Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Natural Cooling method cooling Fan cooling Mass kg 3 2 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V for three phase 400 V series 3 Outpu
97. 6 Deceleration Time for 0 00 to 3600 999 Y Forced Stop H63 Low Limiter Limit by F16 Frequency Limiter Low and continue Y Y Mode selection to run If the output frequency lowers less than the one limited by F16 Frequency Limiter Low decelerates to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency Limiter Low 0 1 Hz Y Y 2 0 0 1 to 60 0 H69 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 5 74 3 Enable Control DC link bus voltage at a constant Y Y Y Y H70 Overload Prevention 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by F08 f Hz s Control 0 01 to 100 00 999 Disable H71 Deceleration 0 Disable Characteristics 1 Enable 1 The factory default of H50 is 5 0 Hz If initialized by H03 the data reverts to 6 0 Hz E Factory defaults H51 Factory defaults Inverter rated capacit a E Asia A Taiwan and Korea K EU E 200 V series 400 V series 200 V series 400 V series 400 V series 2 The factory default of H51 is 42 V If initialized by H03 the data reverts to 38 V H code continued x1 2 3 4 5 Incre nange Data Default RAGT Code Name Data setting range Unit when to ment copying setting running page H80 Gain for Suppression of 0 00 to 0 40 0 01 Y 3 Output Current Depend Fluctuation for Motor ing onthe inverter capacity H86 Reserved 2 0 to 2 1 Y1 y2 Depend ing on the inverter
98. 9 Torque Boost 0 0 to 20 0 Refer to 5 27 Percentage of the rated voltage at base frequency table F05 Note This setting is effective when F37 0 1 3 or 4 F10 Electronic Thermal For general purpose motors with built in self cooling 5 30 Overload Protection for fan Motor Select motor 2 For inverter driven motors or high speed motors with characteristics forced ventilation fan F11 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable i 100 of 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous the motor drive current of the motor rated current 5 22 kW or below 10 30 kW or above F12 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 lt F14 Restart Mode after 0 Disable restart Trip immediately 5 33 Momentary Power Failure Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power Mode selection failure Enable restart Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load F15 Frequency Limiter High cc O 0 to 120 0 Port uz y y 700 53 F16 ow o001200 O0 0 0 to 120 0 AREARE F18 Bias 100 00 to 100 00 1 0 01 Frequency command 1 F20 DC Braking ee 0 to 60 0 Braking start ee F21 Braking level 0 to 60 Rated output current of the inverter interpreted as 100 F22 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 0 01 to 30 00 F23 S
99. A ae x Q a ee i k Ok Qi iR Li Point B La Figure 10 4 Internal Location Diagram FRN110F1S 4L Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 1 8 N m Wire end terminal Hate Figure 10 5 PointA Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 3 5 N m Wire end terminal Screw M5 Figure 10 6 Pont B 10 7 FRN132F1S 4L FRN160F1S 40 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below Point B Pa Figure 10 7 Internal Location Diagram FRN132F1S 40 FRN160F1S 40 Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 1 8 N m Wire end terminal Screw M4 Figure 10 8 PointA Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 3 5 N m Screw M5 Wire end terminal Cable tie P
100. Accl Torque Accl Output kW Output Frequency Base Frequency F04 Output Frequency The figures at left show the acceleration characteristics Maximum Similar characteristics apply PIOQUCNCY r cee a oe x to the deceleration F03 eo Base Frequency fo F04 Time Reference Accl Time Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time considering the machinery s nore load torque Select Starting Characteristics Auto search for idling motor speed Select Starting Characteristics Frequency for idling motor speed H09 and H17 specify the auto search mode for idling motor speed and its frequency respectively to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search mode can be switched by assigning the STM terminal command to one of digital input terminals E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets it as STM being ON by default Searching for idling motor speed When a run command is turned ON with the STM being ON the inverter starts the auto search operation at the auto search frequency specified by H17 to run the idling motor without stopping it If there is a large difference between the motor speed and the auto search frequency the current limiting control may be triggered The inverter automatically reduces its output frequency to harmonize the idling motor speed Upon completion of the harmonization the inverter releases the current limiti
101. B Installing an MC in the secondary circuit Installing an MC in the primary circuit Protecting the motor Discontinuance of power factor correcting ca pacitor Discontinuance of surge killer Reducing noise Measures against surge currents Megger test Control circuit wiring length Wiring length between inverter and motor Wiring type Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or resid ual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker rated current is equiva lent to or lower than the recommended rated current If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s output Secon dary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC ON or OFF Remove the magnet contactor MC already installed and built in surge killer from the inverter s output Secondary circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key
102. B A kW circuit breaker 3 phase S wider _ ocr w o DCR ELCB 75 FRNTSFIS 201 p22 FRN22F1 20 37 FRN37F1 S 20 5 5 FRN5 5F1 20 75 FRN75F1 20 0 pt FRNGIF1S 20 P15 FRN15F1s 20 18 5 FRN18 5F1S 20 22 FRN22F1S 20 30 FRN30F1s 20 37 FRN37F1s 20 45 FRN45F1s 20 OO 5 75 E O 075 O 15 22 et Pie ae Se al a BIS with overcurrent protection 1 FRN4 0F1S 4E 2 0 18 5 30 FRN30F1S 40 37 FRN37F1S 40 p45 FRN45F1S 40 ae et aaa ES 0 8 5 0 75 oy i Main peripheral equipment The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW Note A box L in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination NO S S GO RO RN S a a om OIQININIO gt gt 01 O N O1 MN N gt O01 01 O Jo CO OO OO 01 01 O01 Select the MCCB or RCD ELCB with appropriate breaking capacity according to the power supply capacity 9 1 _ Cc oO E J o 69 T ps oO cC Q p fd Qa O gt Name of peripheral equipment Molded case circuit breaker Earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection Magnetic contactor MC Function and application A WARNING When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker and earth leakage circuit breaker i
103. CB as a sole mechanism of electric shock protection With overcurrent protection Use an MCCB RCD ELCB or MC in conformity with EN or IEC standards When an RCD ELCB is used for protection of electric shock caused by a direct or indirect contact to the live parts insert a type B RCD ELCEB in input lines primary of the inverter for the 3 phase 200 V or 400 V power source Use inverters in an environment that does not exceed pollution degree 2 If inverters are to be used in an environment with pollution degree 3 or 4 place them in an enclosure of IP54 or above To protect human body from an electric shock caused by a contact to live parts install inverters AC re actor and input output filter in the enclosure of IP2X In the case where human body easily contacts to live parts a top panel of the enclosure should be IP4X or higher Do not directly connect a copper wire to the grounding terminal Use a crimp terminal with tin or equivalent plating to connect the earth wire When using inverters at an altitude of more than 2000 m note that the basic insulation applies to the insulation degree of the control circuitry At an altitude of more than 3000 m inverters cannot be used vi Conformity with Low Voltage Directive in the EU continued ACAUTION 8 Use the wires listed in EN60204 Appendix C Recommended wire size mm Control circuit MCCB or i Main power RCD ELCB input Rated current L1 R L2 S
104. CK e Do not remove this cover while applying power Refer to the instruction manual before e This cover can be removed after at least 10min installation and operation of power off and after the CHARGE lamp e Do not remove any cover while applying power turne ott and at least Smin after disconnecting power e Do not insert fingers or anything else into e Securely ground earth the equipment the inverter e Securely ground earth the inverter REOSTNSD ith REOSEHBY HATTER ROBIIC BS RRRS nD REOBCNDO ESA CEOHRICHDZE e EAN RO GHOR SUSAR EEC SBEBHSLUBRL VMESNIK CORTICES C Co HAN BU68N2E rXEOBCNDOO PRICHEMASTHATZE BEHS RAN EMITS eH ARIDA BRR 1OSLLLEBS Only type B of RCD is allowed Fp JSU IDA LORE LTP SAS Tt See manual for details REN eR S Als SABES RO TO R1 T lint BML CUS TE RBRLCD SST Ep eRANNMAIRMCHI CH HORORE FO He RWHEALBUTE 07 Aisld BRICHHISTE FO Warning Plate Warning Plate Warning Label a FRN15F1S 20 b FRN37F1S 20 Note A box O in the above model names replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Figure 1 3 Warning Plates and Label 3 Terminal block location ut 7 Keypad Enclosure g l Openable Control Circuit A Terminal Block Main Circuit Terminal Block Main Circuit Terminal Block Control Circuit Terminal Block Control Circuit i Keypad Enclosure Terminal Block Openable Main Circuit Terminal
105. CR first remove the short bar between terminals P1 and P A DCR is optional for inverters below 75 kW but standard for inverters of 75 kW or above For inverters of 75 kW or above be sure to connect a DCR To protect wiring insert a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power supply and the inverter Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity In addition to an MCCB or ELCB insert if necessary a magnetic contactor MC of the type recommended for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter Furthermore if the coil of the MC or solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter install a surge absorber in parallel To put the inverter on standby by making the control circuit only active with the main circuit power supply being opened connect this pair of wires to terminals R0 and T0 Without connecting this pair of wires to these terminals you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected 8 10 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility You can select the frequency command source either electronically by supp
106. Detect Low Torque Timer The signal U TL turns on when the torque calculated by the inverter with reference to its output current has dropped below the level specified by E80 for the time longer than the one specified by E81 The signal turns off when the calculated torque exceeds the level specified by E80 5 The minimum width of output signal is 100 ms You need to assign the Low output torque detected signal U TL data 45 to the gen eral purpose output terminals Calculated Torque samina NG S fh FBO 5 I The detection level is set so that 100 corresponds to the rated torque of the motor In the inverter s low frequency operation as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs no low torque can be detected within the operation range at less than 20 of the base frequency F04 In this case the result of recognition before entering this operation range is retained The U TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque it is recommended that auto tuning be applied by function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Filter time constant Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Filter time constant These function codes provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input at terminals 12 C1 and V2 Choose appropriat
107. Enable terminal command UP DOWN control FO2 Run Command Enable D keys on keypad 5 23 Motor rotational direction from digital terminals FWD REV Enable terminal command FWD or REV Enable keys on keypad forward 3 Enable keys on keypad reverse FO3 Maximum Frequency 25 0 to 120 0 f Refer to 5 24 table below F04 Base Frequency 25 0 to 120 0 f Refer to table below F05 Rated Voltage 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage Refer to at Base Frequency 80 to 240 Output a voltage AVR controlled table for 200 V series below 160 to 500 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 400 V series FO7 Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 5 27 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start F08 Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup E Factory defaults F03 F04 and F05 Factory defaults Function code Asia A Taiwan and Korea K EU E 200 V series 400 V series 200 V series 400 V series 400 V series 220 V 415 V 2 200 V 400 V 400 V 1 The factory default of F03 F04 is 50 0 Hz If initialized by H03 the data reverts to 60 0 Hz 2 The factory default of F05 is 415 V If initialized by H03 the data reverts to 380 V F code continued Change Code Name Data setting range i when F0
108. FO Instruction Manual Designed for Fan and Pump Applications FRENIC ECO J CAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Eco series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual to be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the installation and instruction manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd INR SI47 1059b E Copyright 2005 2010 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Eco series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor for fan and pump applications Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorr
109. FRN220F 1S FRN220F 18 401 For improvement in EMC compliance for 3 phase 200 V types of inverters consult your Fuji Electric representative for improving EMC compliant level 10 10 Designed For Fan and Pump Applications FRENIL ECO Instruction Manual First Edition May 2005 Third Edition September 2010 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Eco series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Starzen Shinagawa Bldg 2 4 13 Konan Minato ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japan Phone 81 367170617 Fax 81 36717 0585 URL http www fujielectric com fes 2010 09 110b E05 XXCM
110. H51 will be ignored Factory settings For models of 22 kW or below the non linear V f is disabled H50 0 H51 0 For models of 30 kW or above it is enabled that is H50 5 Hz H51 20 V for the 200 V series H50 5 Hz H51 40 V for 400 V series F Rated ca Rated input voltage unction cod Name pacity kW 200 V series 400 V series Base Frequency 5 5 to 75 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz F05 Rated Voltage 5 5 to 75 200 V 400 V at Base Frequency H50 Non linear V f Pattern 30 or below Frequency 51 H Non linear V f Pattern 30 or below Voltage For Japanese models 5 25 Example E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Constant Constant torque output range range Rated voltage at base frequency F05 Output 0 Base Maximum frequency Hz frequency frequency F04 F03 E f Pattern with Non linear Point below the Base Frequency Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency F05 Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 Output i Non linear Base Tequency Fiz V f pattern frequency Frequency F04 H50 E f Pattern with Non linear Point above the Base Frequency Output voltage V Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 arent Rated voltage oY at base frequency F05 Output 0 Base Non linear frequency Hz frequency V f pattern F04 Frequency H50 5 26 FO7 F08 F09 F37 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 FO7 specifies the accelerati
111. Inverter s ROM version Version earlier than 1400 Version 1400 or later Note Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting 4 Electrolytic Capacitor Accumulated run time gt 61000 hours Accumulated run time gt 87000 hours on the printed circuit board Cooling fan Accumulated run time gt 61000 hours Accumulated run time gt 87000 hours 5 5 kW or below Accumulated run time gt 40000 hours Accumulated run time gt 87000 hours 7 5 to 30 kW Accumulated run time gt 25000 hours Accumulated run time gt 61000 hours 37 kW or above estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load Crip The inverter s ROM version can be checked on Menu 5 Maintenance Information 5_ 4 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit include harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculat
112. LD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output ery FWD REV iio OO N E Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning BX ON will immediately stop and the motor will enter the coast to a stop operation without issuing any alarms 5 47 E Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An Alarm Occurrence I Inverter Turning Alarm Display on and No Alarm displayed Running Status Holding Alarm Status Stop and Ready to Run Alarm Output ALM ec OFF i Min 10 ms Reset Alarm l mn o oaj o E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to stop displays the alarm 4 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Ti Use a trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down p the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment E Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 F
113. RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor A I Q UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the key In Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights KEYPAD CONTROL LED LED The lower 3 LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor Indicators in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit kW A Hz r min and m min Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details Unit and mode expression by the three LED indicators While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs at both ends of the lower indicators light In Programming mode WHz OA BkW 3 1 Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Eco supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression Gro N keys stands for pressing the N key while holding down the key Table 3 2 Simultaneous Keying Operation mode Simultaneous keying Change certain function code data Programming keys mod Refer to F00 H03
114. Reset key information LED KEYPAD indicators RUN key Function STOP key Data key Up key Down key Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Item Keys and Functions LED Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes LED m In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency cur Monitor rent and voltage E In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the error factor if the protec tive function is activated Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode Em In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the error factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc E n Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with the V key E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem in dicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor
115. SW4 on the control PCB Refer to Section 2 3 8 and changing data of the function code F29 You can select one of the following signal functions with function code F31 Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Classifi cation Motor output Analog output test PID command PID output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output Input impedance of the external device Max 500Q 4 to 20 mA DC output While the terminal is outputting O to 10 VDC an output less than 0 3 V may become 0 0 V While the terminal is outputting O to 10 VDC it is capable of driving up to two meters with 10 KQ impedance While outputting the current to drive a meter with 500 Q impedance max Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 200 Analog output PID output Input impedance of the external device Max 500Q It is capable of driving a meter with a maximum of 500Q impedance Adjustable gain range 0 to 200 11 Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY FMP Pulse You can select one of the following signal functions with function code F35 monitor Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Uni
116. SoA PID output in as the maximum frequency WW ai Load factor of the motor in as the rated Lit Motor output T OHz OA kW Motor output in kW Analog input signal to the inverter trans Eien formed by E40 and E41 LEAI I Analog input ac OHz OA OkW Refer to the function codes E40 and E41 for details 1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so L i 7 segment letters appear instead 2 For displaying an output voltage on the LED monitor the 7 segment letter is used in the lowest digit as an alternative expression of the unit of the V volt 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID process command specified by the function code J01 1 or 2 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID process command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback value the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 For displaying a load factor on the LED monitor the 7 segment letter _ is used in the lowest digit as an alternative expression of the unit of 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 8 Analog input monitoring becomes active only when any data of the function codes E61 E62 and E63 is effective 20 to define a terminal function
117. T oes Via field bus Inverter itself communications communications Via RS485 communications link option card H30 1 y98 0 link standard link option card option Inverter itself aes H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 sila y98 0 y98 1 H30 2 3 or 5 y98 1 Via R8485 com munications link standard Via RS485 com munications link option card ke e fe 8 c 5 X Via field bus op H30 0 2 or 6 H30 1 3 or 7 tion y98 2 y98 2 H30 6 7 or 8 y98 1 H30 4 50r 8 H30 0 1 to 8 y98 2 y98 3 For details refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 BLOCK DIA GRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS485 communication Users Manual MEH448a or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual e When the LE terminal command is assigned to a digital input terminal and the terminal is ON the settings of function code H30 and y98 are effective When the terminal is OFF the settings of those function codes are ineffective and both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control 5 73 H69 H70 H91 Automatic Deceleration H69 specifies whether automatic deceleration control is to be enabled or disabled During de celeration of the motor if regenerative energy exceeds the level that can be handled by the in verter overvoltage trip may happen With automatic deceleration enabled when the DC link bus voltage exceeds the level int
118. TC switch was turned to PTC when V2 was being used What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code HO7 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern HO7 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter level is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter in F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 F08 Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In the case of a fan or a pump load lower the setting data of the F15 Frequency limiter high In winter the load tends to increase Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 7 Wiring f
119. able of alarm codes Alarm Name Refer to Alarm Name Refer to code code L Ega A ABE ABE Charger circuit fault circuit fault 6413 13 ra Instantaneous overcurrent Electronic thermal overload relay Liu Overvoltage CPU error Lid Option card communications error LILI GEL E 7 Heat sink overheat cs RS485 communications error ca Alarm issued by an external device Hi Data saving error during undervoltage 6 18 LiH Inside of the inverter overheat RS485 communications error a card Li Motor protection Motor protection PTC thermistor thermistor LSI error LSI error Power PCB PCB 1 Zin Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level i Overcurrent occurred during acceleration TW 2 LiL Overcurrent occurred during deceleration Li 7 Overcurrent occurred when running at a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W terminals were and measure the interphase resistance of the wires Check if the resistance short circuited is too low gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 2 Ground faults occurred at Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W the inverter output and perform a Megger test terminals gt Remove the
120. age remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the data for FO9 in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 50 of starting torque 5 28 Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause over current due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level Note When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output Voltage V Rated Voltage at Base Frequency FO5 Increased Output Voltage using Torque Boost F09 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage H51 s y Torque Boost F09 Output Frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz Pattern Frequency Frequency H50 F04 E Automatic torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load automatic torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor CNote e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency F04 the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and other pertinent motor parameters
121. ails of the low output torque detection refer to the description of function codes E80 and E81 E Inverter in remote operation RMT Function code data 54 This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode For details about the remote and local modes refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 3 Switching between remote and local modes E Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Function code data 59 This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal C1 drops below 2 mA after filtered by C38 interpreting it as a terminal C1 wire break Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later Tip The inverter s ROM version can be checked on Menu 5 Maintenance Information G9 E Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode 5 57 E31 E32 E34 E35 Frequency Detection FDT Detection level Frequency Detection FDT Hysteresis width When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 the FDT signal comes ON when it drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 it goes OFF To utilize this feature you need to assign FDT data 2 to any of digital output terminals Output frequency Set frequency Frequency detected FDT Detection le
122. aker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Required torque Wire size Ib in N m AWG mm Inverter type Control circuit Control circuit Main Main terminal i A terminal i 14 FRNO 75F1S 20 FRN1 5F1S 20 2 1 FRN2 2F1S 20 a e Power supply voltage Circuit breaker trip FRN3 7F1S 20 gt FRN5 5F1S 20 FRN7 5F1S 20 O i FRNTIFIS 20 wla a Gay okies FRN37F1S 200 1x2 42 4 FRN45F1S 200 15 9 1 8 Three phas 14 FRN3 7F1S 400 2 1 FRN4 0F1S 4E FRN5 5F1S 40 FRN7 5F1S 40 33 6 FRN11F1S 40 3 8 FRN15F1S 40 FRN18 5F15 40 a 90 75 z 5 RN22F1S 40 10 6 6 1 FRN30F1S 40 1 2 0 7 0 5 l 0 5 0 5 FRN37F1S 40 FRN45F1S 40 FRN55F1S 40 ae a FRN200F1S 40 300x2 152 48 FRN220F1S 40 Ph 400x2 203 Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Three phase 400 V x1 Select the rated current of a fuse or a circuit breaker which is suitable to the connecting wire size 2 The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW E Precautions for use In running general purpose motors In running special mo tors Environ mental con ditions Driving a 400V general purpose motor Torque charac teristics and temperature rise Noise Explosion proof motors Submersible mo tors and pumps Synchronous mo tors Singl
123. alarm occurred Figure 3 13 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 33 Chapter4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on Check the following prior to starting powering on 1 Check if connection is correct Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W respectively and that the grounding wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly Note that FRENIC Eco series inverter is designed for three phase input and driving three phase motors A WARNING e Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur 2 Check for short circuits between terminals and exposed live parts and ground faults Inverter 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws SG UR LS LIT U 4 Check if the motor is separated from mechanical equipment 5 Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not start or operate erroneously at power on 6 Check if safety measures are taken against runaway of the Power system e g a defense to protect people from supply unexpectedly approaching your power system Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 2 Turning
124. all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor parameters Disable 7a 1 to 10 Reset interval 05102000 0 5 to 20 0 Acceleration Deceleration 0 Pattern 1 2 3 Select Starting 0 Characteristics 3 Auto search for idling motor speed 4 5 Linear S curve Weak S curve Strong Curvilinear Disable Enable Follow Run command either forward or reverse Enable Follow Run command both forward and reverse Enable Follow Run command inversely both forward and reverse Deceleration Mode a Normal deceleration Y Y 5 71 Coast to stop Instantaneous Disable Overcurrent Limiting Enable a o rg Momentary Power Failure i Restart time inverter capacity Frequency fall rate 0 00 Set deceleration time 0 0 Hz s 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command Continuous running level 200V series 200 to 300 1 V Y Y2 235 400V series 400 to 600 470 Allowable 0 0 to 30 0 0 1 Y Y 5 33 momentary power 999 The longest time automatically determined by the i i inverter Select Starting 0 0 to 120 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 5 69 Characteristics 999 Harmonize at the maximum frequency failure time Frequency for idling motor speed PTC Thermistor Mode selection Disable Y Y Enable Upon detection of PTC the inverter immediately trips and stops with 744 displayed Enable Upon detection of PTC the inverter continues running while output
125. als and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently 2 15 Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter Figure 2 12 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment Wiring procedure Grounding terminals G Inverter output terminals U V W and G DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P Switching connectors For the models of 200 V series 45 kW or above for 400 V series 55 kW or above Refer to page 2 18 DC link bus terminals P and N Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T Auxiliary power input terminals for the control circuit RO and TO Auxiliary power input terminals for the fans R1 and T1 For models of 200 V series 45 KW or above for 400 V series 55 kW or above Refer to page 2 22 Perform wiring as necessary Molded Case 4 Setup internally i Breaker For 200 V series 45 kW or above Residual current for 400 V series operated Protective s Device RCD Earth TuDu Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection 55 kW or above Other Inverter s Magnetic Contactor 7 DC Reactor DCR Note A box O in the above figure replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Figure 2 12 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment 2 16 Grounding terminals G
126. an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system mal functions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power source Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for ap proximately 3 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals Y5A C and 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand fre quent ON OFF switching Where a frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 through Y3 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched on and off at one second intervals 5 52 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 YSA C and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Functions assigned Symbol Active ON Active OFF 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 1002 Frequency detected FDT 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF 7 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and SW52 2 inverter output For primary side 3 Switch motor
127. anagement code If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Terminal Block Cover Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate Cable Guide Keypad Plate i gS Warning FAR Sub Plate Nameplate Nameplate Main Circuit Control Circuit Screw Terminal Block Cover Terminal Block Terminal Block a FRN15F1S 20 Control Circuit Terminal Block Warning Label Warning Plate Charging Lamp Main Circuit Terminal Block Front Cover Main Nameplate Front Cover b FRN37F1S 200 Internal Air Circulation DC Fan Control Circuit Terminal Block Upper Front Warning Cover Label Warning Plate fh of 4 A Wate eS am y F pp ENA Charging Lamp SAR Lower Front Cover Main Nameplate Lower Front Cover c FRN220F1S 40 Main Circuit Terminal Block Note A box O in the above model names replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters 1 2 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC ECO A WARNING A WARNING sheets thelretucsninanuelbecia A WARN l NG installation and operation a RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK RISK OF ELECTRIC SHO
128. and 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is de fined by the combination of the bias F18 and its reference point C50 Point B by the combi nation of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its reference point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 and that of C42 and C44 to V2 Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias reference point C50 and gain reference point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 e The analog input less than the bias reference point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias reference point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain reference point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency BECO eC REECE EERE ER CEOS ECE EE eeE ERE EEC EC EERE RE LETT UT Gain C32 C37 or C42 Point B Bias Caculbeacubcnacuudvesucelveutebvelyasseesavesspacsteus soles F18 Point A Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 Reference Reference Point Point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and its reference points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 100
129. and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types Linear S curve weak S curve strong Curve constant output max capacity Shutoff of the operation command coasts the motor to decelerate and stop Control Indication Item Explanation Remarks Frequency limiter High and low limiters can be set setting range 0 to 120 Hz Selection can be made between continuation of operation and stopping at frequencies equal to or smaller than the lower limit Bias frequency Bias of frequency and PID commands can be set in the range between 0 and 100 Gain for frequency The analog input gain can be set in the range from 0 to 200 Voltage signals terminal setting 12 V2 and current signal terminal C1 can be set independently Jump frequency setting 3 operation points and their common jump hysteresis width 0 to 30 Hz can be set Restart after momentary The inverter restarts upon recovery from power failure without stopping the motor power failure In the operation continuation mode recovery of the power supply is waited for while the output frequency slightly drops Selection can be made among starting at 0 Hz starting at the frequency immediately before the momentary power failure and starting at the frequency specified in the starting mode after power recovery Current limit Keeps the current under the preset value during operation Line inverter switching e Line inverter switching s
130. ases leakage current as shown on the next page 10 3 Table 10 1 EMC compliant Filters and Leakage Current Powel 2 i Leakage current mA 1 2 supply Inverter type A 3 oy Installation style filter model Tp 7 voltage Normal condition Worst condition FRNO 75F1S 2C FRN1 5F1S 20 EFL 4 0E11 2 FRN2 2F1S 20 FRN3 7F1S 20 FRN5 5F1S 2C0 EFL 7 5E11 2 FRN7 5F1S 2C 3 phase 200 V Split style See Figure 10 2 B FRN11F1S 20 EFL 15SP 2 FRN15F1S 20 FRN18 5F1S 20 EFL 22SP 2 FRN22F1S 20 FRN30F1S 20 FS5536 180 40 FRN37F1S 20 FS5536 250 28 FRN45F1S 20 FRN55F1S 20 FS5536 400 99 FRN75F1S 20 wl N N ot o ol gt N N w w oO fo Footmount style See Figure 10 2 A 2 FRN22F1S 40 FRN30F1S 40 FS5536 100 35 FRN37F1S 40 FRN45F1S 40 FRN55F1S 40 FS5536 180 40 FRN75F1S 40 FRN90F1S 40 FRN110F1S 40 FS5536 250 28 FRN132F1S 40 FRN160F1S 40 FRN200F1S 40 FS5536 400 99 1 FRN220F1S 40 w N Split style See Figure 10 2 B N FRNO 75F1S 40 FRN1 5F1S 400 FRN2 2F1S 40 EFL 4 0G11 4 FRN3 7F1S 40 FRN4 0F1S 4E 3 FRN5 5F1S 401 4 FRN7 5F1S 40 EFL 7 5G11 4 FRN11F1S 401 FRN15F1S 4 00 4 EFL 15G11 4 FRN18 5F1S 40 EFL 22G11 4 3 phase E 400 V Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 1 The values are calculated assuming the power supply frequency of 50 Hz for both 3 phase 240V and 3 phase 400V
131. at will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 Ifthe inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating 2 The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package to within 70 3 If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control board at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capa
132. ata setting range i when 0 Disable 1 to 120 999 Depends on the setting of J36 Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1A B C Y2A B C and Y3A B C 100 Depends on the setting of E20 to E22 60 1060 Mount motor 1 inverter driven M1_l 61 1061 Mount motor 1 commercial power driven 62 1062 Mount motor 2 inverter driven 63 1063 Mount motor 2 commercial power driven 64 1064 Mount motor 3 inverter driven 65 1065 Mount motor 3 commercial power driven 67 1067 Mount motor 4 commercial power driven ae 68 1068 Periodic switching early warning MCHG 69 1069 Pump control limit signal MLIM Indication of cumulative run time of motor for replacement Indication of the maximum number of ON times of relay Times contacts on the relay output card or those built in inverter Display of 1 000 means 1000 times For built in mechanical contacts i EIES y codes Link Functions Change Code Data setting range it when y01 RS485 Communication 1 to 255 Standard Station address y02 Communications error 0 Immediately mpa ano alarm 4 processing 1 Trip and alarm after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the p a by timer y03 If retry fails trip and alarm 47 If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run y03 Error processing timer y04 Transmission speed 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bp
133. ated as stated below When an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or below is connected to a public low voltage power supply it is subject to the harmonics emission regulations users A and B below except when the inverter is connected to an industrial low voltage power supply user C below See Figure 10 1 for details Medium Voltage Medium to low voltage transformer power supply Medium to low voltage transformer Public low voltage s lt Industrial low voltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 kW or 1 kW or below below User A The inverter connected here is The inverter connected subject to the harmonics here is not subject to the regulation If the harmonics harmonics regulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 10 1 Connection to Power Line 10 4 2 Conformity with the harmonics regulation A general purpose industrial inverter is not a product in conformity with EN61000 3 2 A14 When you connect it to a low voltage commercial power supply you must obtain permission of the local power supplier See the case of User A or B in Figure 10 1 above If you need harmonic current data of the inverter consult your Fuji Electric representative 10 2 10 5 Conformity with the EMC Directive in the EU 10 5 1 General The CE Marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment in
134. ations control below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS485 or other optional commu nications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted Refer to the RS485 Communication User s Manual MEH448a for details on input commands sent through RS485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well 3 23 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 18 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3 10 shows the menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance information g i mode I I I I I I I I I I I I I OAc List of maintenance items Maintenance info I I I I I I I I I I 4 I I I I I I Cumulative run time DC link bus voltage Option s ROM version Cumulative run time of the motor Figure 3 1
135. ault LOC is assigned to X5 Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote mode If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local the run command is automatically turned on so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over If however there is a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad e g switching from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode the inverter automatically stops The transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value on off of LOC as shown in the status transition diagram given below Also refer to Table 3 7 Run Commands from the Keypad in Local Mode for details For further details on how to specify run and frequency commands in remote and local modes refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator LOC OFF Local Mode LOC ON Remote Mode LOC OFF LOC ON Transition between Remote and Local Modes by LOC 3 9 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 8 lists menus available in Programming mode T
136. be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running The data of the function codes is protected The WE KP command Enable editing of function code data from keypad is not input though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal The key was not pressed The setting data of function code F02 could not be changed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes Check the data of function code FOO Data protection gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 to 0 Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 to 0 or input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function code data gt Press the Gi key after changing the function code data The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are concurrently turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 7 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor E Quick reference t
137. ble to the following two contact output modes Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Terminals 30B and 30C are closed non excited for ON signal output Active OFF Relay contact output RJ 45 Standard 1 Used to connect the inverter with PC or PLC using RS485 port The inverter connector RJ 45 supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The extension for the connector cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying keypad the keypad power 2 Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate for setting of the terminating resistor 4 5 VDC Communication RJ 45 Connector Face Resistor SW3 R445 Connector Pin Assignment Figure 2 25 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment 2 30 Wiring for control circuit terminals E For models of FRN132F1S 40 to FRN220F1S 401 A box LJ replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Route the control circuit cable in keeping with the left side panel of the inverter as shown in Figure 2 26 Fasten the control
138. by UL or cUL 10 1 10 2 Conformity with EU Directives eee 10 1 10 3 Conformity with Low Voltage Directive 10 1 10 3 1 Generali Ze aeea eaaa e E ak att 10 1 10 3 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product in conformity with Low Voltage Directive 10 1 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 2 10 4 Generalno ce cea a esa aa e eiaa 10 2 10 4 2 Conformity with the harmonics regulation 10 2 10 5 Conformity with the EMC Directive in the EU 10 3 105 1 Gemper 16 8403 sct eit tele de 10 3 10 5 2 EMC compliant filter Option 0 10 3 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 5 10 5 4 EMC compliant environment and class 10 6 XIV Chapter1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package e Cooling fan fixing screws for inverters of 7 5 to 30 kW e Keypad fixing screws for inverters of 0 75 to 30 kW e Bush rubbers for cable guide plate for inverters of 0 75 to 22 kW e Instruction manual this manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model you ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter an
139. by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitors of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occur take an appropriate measure against them Table 2 13 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit Decrease the carrier frequency breaker that is connected to Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter the input primary has tripped Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that has a longer sensitive current than With overcurrent protection one currently being used Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against harmonic component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay was Decrease the carrier frequency activated Increase the settling current of the thermal relay Use the electronic thermal relay built in the inverter instead of an external thermal relay 2 37 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists of 7 segment a four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED monitor LED indicators ERUN E CONTROL The keypad allows you to run and stop the a motor monitor running status and switch to mcm A mW the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the function code data monitor I O signal Program states maintenance information and alarm
140. case the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply exceeds 3 you would need to take other measures such as increasing the capacity of the inverter Contact your Fuji Electric representative In a DC link bus system using terminals P and N the AC reactor protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current Voltage unbalance 7 9 3 m Name of option Function and application External An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer potentiometer for to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter frequency commands Multi function Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter including voltage current and input power as keypad well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode Equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC Eco inverter to another Extension cable The extension cable connects the RS485 communications port standard with a keypad or for remote an RS485 USB converter keypad operation Three lengths are available 5 m 3m and 1m RS485 This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy Option Communications Card RS485 USB A converter that allows connection of an RS485 communications port to a USB port on a PC converter Inverter support Inverter support loader software Windows GUI Graphics User Interface based t
141. circuit cable to the cable tie support with a cable tie insulation lock as shown in Figure 2 26 The hole in the cable tie support is 3 8 mm x 1 5 mm in size To pass the cable tie through the hole it should be 3 8 mm or less in width and 1 5 mm or less in thickness Cable tie Cable tie support Control circuit cable Control circuit terminal board ete SEARRE CE oN A N 7 Control circuit cable Figure 2 26 Routing and Fastening the Control Circuit Cable CNote Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit Such as the terminal block of the main circuit 2 31 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate A WARNINGA Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of 37 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 37 kW or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as th
142. citors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to motors or run the motor 1 4 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Item Specifications Site location Indoors Ambient 10 to 50 C Note 1 temperature Relative 5 to 95 No condensation humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa pressure Vibration For inverters of 75 kW or below 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz For inverters of 90 kW or above 3 m s Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 2 m s 9 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to approx 90 C during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of mate
143. ck value under o value PV PID control 100 of the feedback value DC link bus DC link bus voltage of 500 V for 200 V series voltage the inverter 1000 V for 400 V series Command via commu nications link Refer to 10 Universal AO the R8485 Communica 20 000 as 100 tions User s Manual MEH448a Motor output Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output 14 Calibration ana Full scale output of the 10 VDC or 20 mA DC log output meter calibration PID process Process command un command SV der PID control T0070 OMMO Ieechacn valle Output level of the PID 16 PID process controller under PID output MV control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 5 43 F33 Pulse Output FMP Pulse rate F34 Duty F35 Function The control PCB is equipped with either a screw terminal base or Europe type terminal block supporting FMP or FMI respectively The FMP enables F33 to F35 but the FMI enables only F34 and F35 so that F33 will not appear For FMP These function codes allow you to output to terminal FMP monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in the form of a variable rate pulse train or a These function codes allow you to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current to terminal FMP in the form of a variable rate pulse train or a fixed rate pulse train The fixed rate pulse train whose pulse duty control produces a variance of an average output
144. cluding CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore it is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to ensure that the equipment including the product inverter or connected with it actually complies with the standard and to put a CE Marking as the equipment In general the user s equipment comprises a variety of products supplied from a number of manufacturers in addition to Fuji inverters Therefore the manufacturer of the final equipment needs to take responsibility for conformity In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above it is necessary to use a Fuji inverter in connection with an EMC compliant filter option and install it in accordance with the instructions contained in this instruction manual Install the Fuji inverter in a metal enclosure Tip To use Fuji EMC filter built in inverters refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Supplement for EMC Filter Built in Type Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 5 2 EMC compliant filter Option There are two installation styles of an optional EMC compliant filter Footmount and split styles As listed on the next page the footmount style applies to inverters with 3 phase 400 V 0 75 to 22 kW and the split style to inverters with 3 phase 200 V and 3 phase 400 V 30 to 220 kW For how to install the EMC compliant filter see Section 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter Note The use of an EMC compliant filter incre
145. ction code H98 6 Problem eM Ur Possible Causes 1 2 7 Problem Inverter output wires are broken Wires for motor winding are broken The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough A single phase motor has been connected GH Heat sink overheat Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications 2 Air vent is blocked 3 Accumulated running time of the cooling fan exceeded the standard period for replacement or the cooling fan malfunctioned 4 Load was too heavy Output phase loss Output phase loss occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires Measure the output current gt Replace the motor Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Eco only drives three phase induction motors Temperature around heat sink rose What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the enclosure well Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative running time of the cooling
146. cts inverter motors over the entire frequency range FO 2 The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 and F12 A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals V2 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the control PCB accordingly Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the motor is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the motor Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter issues an alarm and stops the inverter output lt Alarm reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the data is written If E a memory error is detected the inverter stops The inverter stops by detecting a communications error between the inverter and the keypad during operation using the standard keypad or the multi function keypad optional If the inverter detects a CPU erro
147. cumulative run time of the motor to any value you choose For example by specifying 0 you can clear the cumulative run time of the motor CNote The data for H94 is in hexadecimal notation Check the cumulative run time of the motor on the keypad Clear Alarm Data H97 deletes the information such as alarm history and data at the time of alarm occurrence in cluding alarms that have occurred during the check up or adjustment of the machinery Data is then brought back to a normal state without an alarm Deleting the alarm information requires simultaneous keying of 10 and N keys Clear all This data clears all alarm data stored and returns to 0 Protection Maintenance Function H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of the carrier frequency b protection against input phase loss c protection against output phase loss and d judgment on the DC link bus capacitor life and the change of judgment criteria on the DC link bus capacitor life and the selection of handling on DC fan lock detection in a style of combination Automatic lowering function of carrier frequency You have to prevent important machinery from stopping as much as possible Even if the inverter is in heat sink overheating or overload state because of excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or a trouble in the cooling system with this function enabled the inverter lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping 477 LiHJ o
148. cy F04 5 61 P99 H03 Motor Selection Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal motor overload protection uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete data of P03 P0O6 PO7 and P08 and the old related internal data are automatically updated For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type e P99 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard e P99 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard e P99 4 Other manufacturer s or unknown motors CNote If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Fuji standard 8 series Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code settings to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the HO3 data it is necessary to press and A keys or and Q keys simul taneously Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor parameters in accordance with P02 rated capacity and P99 motor selection 2
149. cy of the inverter motor speed Data for Function F01 C30 Enable WIO keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency ob tained at 10 VDC 2 Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC 5 Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency ob tained at 10 VDC 1 7 Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals Assign UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Note Certain source settings e g communications link and multistep frequency have priority over the one specified by F01 For details refer to the block diagram in the FRENIC Eco Users Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator 5 22 F02 Tip You can modify the reference frequency anywhere you choose using the gain and bias settings to these analog inputs voltages entered via terminals 12 and V2 the current entered via terminal C1 For details refer to function code F18 e You can enable the noise
150. d are located as shown on the following page For the inverter whose capacity is 37 kW or above its mass is printed on the nameplate FC Fuji Electric FRNS5 5F1S 2A SOURCE 3PH 200 240V 50Hz 60Hz 31 5A OUTPUT 3PH 200 240V 0 1 120Hz TYPE FRN5 5F15 2A 9 OkVA 23 8A 120 1min SER No WO0O5A123A0001Z SER No WO5A123A0001Z 019 MASS 34kg c S LISTER ER 7B IND CONT EQ a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 5 5 F1S 2A ee a nn ae Code Series name Shipping destination FRN FRENIC series Instruction manual version Code Applicable motor rating A _ Asia English 0 75 0 75 kW EA Korea English 1 5 1 5 kW 2 2 2 2 kW 37 37 kW Code Power supply voltage 2 Three phase 200 V 132 132 kW 4 __ Three phase 400 V 160 160 kw 200 200 kW Code Enclosure 220 220 kW S Standard IP20 IP00 Code Applicable area F Fan and pump application Code Development code 1 1 SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current overload capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 37 kW or above SER No Product number W05A123A0001Z Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year Fuji m
151. d is not assigned to any terminal the inverter will interpret WWE KP to be always ON by default Not If you mistakenly assign a WE KP command to a terminal you cannot edit or modify function code data anymore In such a case temporarily turn on the WE KP assigned terminal and then reassign the WE KP command to a correct terminal E Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency command To select the inverse operation turn the IVS command ON Output frequency Inverse 100 Roos 4 as 3 Normal 0 7 OV 10V Analog input voltage 4mA 20 mA Analog input current The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by the Switch normal inverse operation command Tip For details of PID control refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 9 PID Frequency Command Generator and Chapter 9 Section 9 2 6 J codes 5 49 e When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 The Switch normal invers
152. d transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately 7 8 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V series Type FRN___F1S 2 01 0 75 15 2 2 37 15 5 7 5 15 185 22 30 37 45 Nominal applied motor kW 110 75 1 5 12 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 Rated capacity kVA 2116 26 40 16 3 19 0 12 17 122 27 32 43 53 64 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 V 50 Hz 200 220 230 240 V 60 Hz With AVR function Rated current A 4 5 42 7 0 10 6 16 7 23 8 131 8 45 58 73 85 114 140 170 22 5 29 42 55 68 80 107 130 156 Overload capability 120 of rated current for 1 min Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Output ratings Three phase 200 to 220 V 50 Hz Three phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Single phase 200 to 220 V 50 Hz Single phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Auxiliary fan None Single phase 200 to 220 V 50 Hz power input Single
153. data of the function 237 Q code H26 AY Figure 2 17 Internal Circuit Diagram SW5 Selecting PTC 11 Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals 13 12 C1 V2 common and FMA These terminal are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 24 J Q G D 2 a lt Symbol Table 2 11 Continued Name Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external Potentiometer Vaea eed es 1kto5k amp noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 18 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shielding effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 19
154. des and the connection Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 Enable Gun G10 keys on keypad forward or 3 Enable keys on keypad reverse 4 Ifthe speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command 6 4 Possible Causes 2 3 4 5 The external frequency command source device was used Frequency switching or multistep frequency command was enabled The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long The inverter output is hunting due to vibration caused by low stiffness of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal Check whether the frequency command source has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command source or insert a ferrite co
155. detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 ms this function stops the inverter output If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload condition alarm code Li or Li the output frequency of the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Not applicable 8 19 LED Alarm monitor output displays 80A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Eco Use them in accordance with your system requirements For details refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Name of peripheral Function and application equipment Molded case MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control board and circuit breaker inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T from overload or short circuit which in turn MCCB prevents secondary disasters caused by the inverter malfunctioning Residual current RCDS ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and RCDs ELCBs that operated satisfy the recommended rated current listed below ee device T Applicable Rated current of D ee motor rating Inverter type MCCB and ELC
156. drive source between commercial power and SW52 1 inverter output For secondary side 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY Switch motor drive source between commercial power and SW88 inverter output For MC on commercial line a aa 1015 imary side 1015 Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side AX 2 2 2 2 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN 1026 Auto resetting TRY 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 1027 Universal DO U DO 1033 Command loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 1030 Service life alarm LIFE 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 1037 0 4 4 4 4 1043 Under PID control PID CTL 1044 Motor stopping due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP ide 1054 Inverter in remote operation RMT 1055 Run command activated AX2 1056 Motor overheat detected PTC THM 1045 Low output torque detected U TL PIDAN 7 7 1060 Mount motor 1 inverter driven M1_l 1 1061 Mount motor 1 commercial power driven M1_L 1063 Mount motor 2 commercial power driven M2_L 1062 Mount motor 2 inverter driven _l 1064 Mount motor 3 inverter driven l 5 6 8 0 3 5 6 2 3 4 5 4 5 6 9 2 3 4 5 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 MOL 67 Ma CHG MIN ALN Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later
157. e ERN4SE1S 201 FRN55F1S 20 ooy ERNSSE1S 201_ 355 275 339 345 2 FRN37F 18 40 FRN45F1S 4o 220 240 304 310 2 550 530 FRN55F15 40 i Three ERNZSF1S40 355 275 339 345 2 ohase ERN90F15 40 a Poou ERN110F15 40 FRN132F15 40 z7 FRN160F15 40 RRES 530 430 503 509 2 13 5 15 FRN220F15 40 FRN75F1S 20 Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination N O D z O Q O N oO wo ol 8 14 8 5 2 DC reactor 4 x Mounting Power supply Inverter type Reactor Mounting Terminal Mass voltage through through hole for hole for ZOE TA n 185 1062 85 15 84 B00 V 225 140 10 2 11 4 7 4 8 4 10 3 TFRN7SFIS 4D DOR4 75 256 10 295 10622 86 124 Three FRNOOF1S 401_ DGR4 90C 255 10 225 116 2 96 47 400 V FRN110F1S 4C1 DCR4 110C 300 10 265 116 2 90 18 4 22 0 25 5 29 5 32 5 Note 1 For inverters of 75 kW or above types FRN75F1S 20 FRN75F1S 40 or above a DC reactor is attached as standard 2 A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 8 15 8 5 3 Keypad Unit mm Panel surface Inside panel I I g g 2x 64 I I Y i 16 98 la yo Be aaa aa _ L 53 8 15 24 61 _ 9 5 Dimensions of holes in
158. e Menus 0 1 and Menu display mode 7 Function code data check mode Menus 2 and 7 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 Oo Oo o a 8 _ The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 2 LCD monitor settings are applicable only to the inverter equipped with a multi function keypad 3 Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later E Factory defaults E31 Asia A Taiwan and Korea K EU E Function code 200 V series 400 V series 200 V series 400 V series 400 V series 4 The factory default of E31 is 50 0 Hz If initialized by H03 the data reverts to 60 0 Hz E code continued Change Code Data setting range it when running E61 None Auxiliary frequency command 1 Auxiliary frequency command 2 E62 PID process command 1 5 PID feedback value E63 V2 20 Analog input monitor E64 Saving Digital Reference 0 Auto saving at the time of main power turned off Frequency 1 Saving by pressing Gi key E65 Command Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop Level 20 to 120 999 Disable E80 Detect Low Torque
159. e 3 5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter func tions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode 3 14 Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 1 Data Setting Zz O D z 6 oO Running mode Programming mode Function code data List of function codes lt _ oss om ies mr Ty g o co ae ry m Y Cay on Cy wr C Mp co CJ mo C3 an U Uy UJ LJ LJ D o a Se J J n mn A A A A A Move to Menu 2 or 7 Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 1 Data Setting Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 3 15 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if neces
160. e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the key again to start driving the motor and increase the frequency command using N Q keys Check the above points for the test driving of the motor 4 2 Operation After confirming ordinary operation by performing a test run make mechanical connections connections of the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and set the necessary parameters properly before starting a production run Note Depending on the conditions of the production run further adjustments can be required such as adjustments of torque boost F09 acceleration time F07 and deceleration time F08 Make sure to set relevant function codes properly 4 4 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Eco series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into eight groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions of Frequency C codes Motor Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Appli cation Functions J codes Link
161. e and local by an external digital input signal For details of the local mode refer to Switching between remote and local modes in Chapter 3 Section 3 3 3 E Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Function code data 39 Turning this terminal command ON supplies a DC current to the motor that is on halt in order to generate heat preventing dew condensation For details of dew condensation protection refer to function code J21 Dew condensation prevention Duty E Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 Run forward 2 and Run reverse 2 FWD2 and REV2 Function code data 87 88 or 89 These terminal commands switch the run command source They are useful to switch the source between the digital input and the local keypad when the Enable communications link command LE and Select local keypad operation command LOC are turned OFF Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Drive Com mand Generator for details Run command source FR2 FR1 Communications link disabled Communications link enabled Normal operation OFF Follow the data of F02 Follow the data of SO6 FWD REV FWD2 or REV2 Follow the data of S06 FWD2 REV2 Turning the FWD2 command ON runs the motor forward and turning the REV2 command reverse Turning either of them OFF decelerates the motor to stop 5 51 E20 to E22 E24 E27 E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning t
162. e auto search and the starting pattern patterns 1 to 4 If the motor is idling in the reverse direction that is against the specified direction because of natural convection it is necessary to start it in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the original reference frequency When the rotational direction of the idling motor is unknown two starting patterns are provided as listed below which start search from the forward rotation and if not succeeded from the reverse rotation e g HO9 5 pattern 3 start search from the reverse rotation e g HO9 5 pattern 4 Rotational direction Data for H09 Blane Stator auto search Starting pattern 3 4 5 5 70 H11 Starting patterns The inverter makes its frequency shift in accordance with the starting patterns shown below to search the speed and rotation direction of the idling motor When harmonization is complete between the motor speed including its rotation direction and the inverter output frequency the frequency shift by auto search operation is terminated Forward Forward H17 H17 Reverse Reverse Pattern 2 Pattern 4 Forward Forward H17 H17 H17 Reverse Reverse H17 Only when the auto search has not succeeded at the first trial the starting from the opposite direction is attempted Starting Patterns Not Auto search operation is attempted using one of the patterns shown above If not succeeded it will be tried again If seven consecutive r
163. e di rection of rotation Note When function code F02 0 or 1 the run forward FWD and run reverse REV commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively In addition to the run command F02 described there are several other sources available with priority over F02 Remote Local switching Communications link Run forward command 2 FWD2 and Run reverse command 2 REV2 For details refer to the block diagram in the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator 5 23 FO3 F04 FOS H50 H51 The table below shows relationship between keying and run commands in running per a keypad F02 0 rotation direction is defined by the digital inputs ee ee Wor om mm oxo Nor nea nor o ON Rimes O oa or Nose CNote e Digital input commands FWD and REV are valid for specifying the motor rotation direction and the commands FWD2 and REV2 are invalid e If you have assigned the FWD or REV function to the FWD or REV terminal you cannot change the setting of function code F02 while the terminals FWD and or REV are on e Make sure that terminals FWD and REV are off before changing the FWD or REV function from the function other than the FWD and REV functions to FWD or REV function Because if under this condition you assign the FWD or REV function to the FWD or REV terminal while the terminals FWD and or REV are on the motor wou
164. e in the following formula m Three phase input Power factor Elect power iy x 100 V 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit c DC link bus Input primary side Output Secondary side voltage _ P N Voltage Current Voltage Current O D gt O Oe o g Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter z AR As AT VR Vs VT WR WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww V Z Rectifier or moving iron type Moving iron type Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC power meter power meter power meter power meter Moving coil type A Note It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Type of meter Symbol of meter 7 5 P NC L1 R U seh Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters 7 5 Insulation Test Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment avoid a Megger test If a Megger test is unavoidable follow the procedure below Because a wrong test procedure will cause breakage of the inverter take sufficient care A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test procedure is wrong When the dielectric strength test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative
165. e inverter overload prevention control Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively Output frequency Maximum Frequency F03 Frequency Limiter Upper F15 Frequency Limiter Lower F16 Reference frequency Note e When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the running frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 and F15 gt F25 F03 gt F16 where F23 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally 5 38 F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 C44 Bias Bias Reference Point Frequency command 1 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain reference point Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Gain Gain reference point Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Gain Gain reference point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the rela tionship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference fre quency specified by frequency comm
166. e motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output lines Cc 2 prar Q O OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Note Use an OFL within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency Otherwise the filter will overheat Ferrite ring An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter reactors for An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation reducing radio for the power supply primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together frequency noise through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times ACL If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply primary lines if it is more than 20 m insert it to the power output secondary lines of the inverter EMC compliant A special filter for making the inverter in conformity with Europe s EMC directives filter AC Reactor e This optional feature must be connected to the primary side commercial power supply ACR side of the inverter when the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply is 2 to 3 Max voltage V Min voltage V lt 6 3 phase average voltage V In
167. e operation command IVS can apply only to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and Switch normal inverse operation IVS determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 IVS Final operation Porro 0 Normal operation oOo o oe 1 Inverse operation E interlock IL Function code data 22 In a configuration where a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the power output secondary circuit of the inverter the momentary power failure detection feature provided inside the inverter may not be able to accurately detect a momentary power failure by itself Using a digital signal input with the interlock command IL assures the accurate detection No momentary power failure has occurred A momentary power failure has occurred Restart after a momentary power failure enabled For details of operation after a recovery from momentary power failure refer to the de scription of function code F14 E Enable communications link via RS485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98
168. e phase motors Installation loca tion When driving a 400V general purpose motor with an inverter using ex tremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause ab normal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber is recom mended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance These motors have a larger ra
169. e values for the time constants con sidering the response speed of the mechanical system as large time constants slow down the response In case the input voltage fluctuates because of noise specify large time constants Motor No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value shown on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to function code E43 The following formula is used for the conversion Motor speed r min 129 No of poles x Frequency Hz Motor Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Dependency on function code P99 0 01 to 1000 5 60 P03 P04 P06 PO7 P08 Motor Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Motor Auto tuning This function automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in the inverter s in ternal memory Basically you do not need to perform tuning if you use a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases you may not obtain the best performance under auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring or auto energy saving operation by default settings since the motor parameters are different from that of Fuji standard motors In such a case perform auto tunin
170. ect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Eco Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 e RS485 Communication User s Manual MEH448 e Catalog MEH442 e RS485 Communications Card OPC F1 RS Installation Manual INR SI47 0872 e Relay Output Card OPC F1 RY Instruction Manual INR SI47 0873 e Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 Installation Manual INR SI47 0880 e Panel mount Adapter MA F1 Installation Manual INR S147 0881 e Multi function Keypad TP G1 Instruction Manual INR SI47 0890 E e FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual INR SI47 0903 E The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety infor mation and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual AN WARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions
171. ed in cascade to outside instrument and gauges if some difference in potential is there between the inverter and peripheral equipment regarding connection of analog input etc Avoid needlessly long wiring 5 42 E Output adjustment F30 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by function code F31 within the range of 0 to 200 Out of Scale F30 200 10 V 20 MA fo ey F30 100 Output Voltage Current OV C2mA ana F30 50 T E F30 0 p 0 V 4 mA 0 50 100 Meter Scale E Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to the analog output terminal FMA Function Meter scale Batadorp Ea EMA output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output fre Output frequency of the Maximum frequency F03 quency inverter Output current Pupur CUNENE ae Twice the inverter rated current the inverter Output voltage RMS o 250 V for 200 V series Output voltage E inverter TTE V for 400 V series Output torque torque Motor shaft Motor shafttorque Twice the rated motor Twice the rated motor torque Twice the rated motor load or e Rated output torque of the Load factor Equivalent motor at the base frequency Load factor to the indication of the or below load meter e Rated motor output kW at the base frequency or above Input power of the in Twice the rated output of the in Input power verter verter PID feedback Feedba
172. elow the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor No alarm code appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation Co to Section 6 2 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed 5 If grating sound can be heard 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time 7 Even if the power recovers after an instantaneous power failure the motor does not restart Problems with inverter settings C Co to Section 6 2 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed f an alarm code appears on the LED monitor Go io Section 6 3 f an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor amp Goto Section 6 4 while no alarm code is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 1 The
173. eme diagram below lt Operation timing scheme gt Alarm factor Protection function Tripped state I H05 o H05 H05 HOS Reset command Ast 2nd 3rd th Inverter output frequency Auto reseting signal 0 Time 5 67 HOG H07 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and to reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan is stopped when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter is stopped However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life it is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started This function code H06 Cooling fan ON OFF control allows you to specify whether the cooling fan is to be kept running all the time or to be controlled ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable Acceleration Deceleration Pattern HO7 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns Patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce the impact on the inverter driven motor and or its mechanical load during accelera tion deceleration the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the accelera tion deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are availab
174. ent 0sseeeeeees 2 37 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad 5 xn cee Meets cece pone poet 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes cceeeeeeees 3 2 3 3 Running Mode aaaeaii n milli ane meh 3 4 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 4 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID process COMMANGS sassssieseeshels cvatkirevcdsktseed 3 5 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor ee 3 8 3 4 Programming Mode n s 3 10 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup eee 3 12 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 0 eee 3 14 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking eee 3 16 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 008 3 17 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking 3 20 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 24 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 08 3 27 3 4 8 Data copying information Menu 7 Data Copying eeeeeee 3 29 3 5 Alarm Mode l a 3 32 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR see 4 1 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test ene 4 1 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to DOW STING OM A EEE EE ETTET 4 1 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking 000000 4 1 4 1 3 Preparati
175. ent detection Level and the output current continues longer than the period specified by E35 Current detection Timer The signal turns off when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ID Current detection data 37 to any of digital output terminals EREE E ae ee See e eee ete See eee Ser eas E34 x 0 9 Output Current i E35 lt A _ gt I ___ 5 58 E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ 4j in a part of maintenance information on the keypad The input watt hour data will be displayed as follows E51 Coefficient for input watt hour data x Input watt hour kWh Note Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous display coefficient otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated For the procedure for viewing maintenance information refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD E65 Command Loss Detection Level When the analog frequency command by frequency setting through terminals 12 C1 and V2 has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the fre
176. enters the restart mode after a re covery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is recovered the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a mo mentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay se quence circuits may also drop the run command may be turned off In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for input of a run command after the inverter enters ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the data of F14 Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure will be canceled and the inverter needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay In case the run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the direction of rotation is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the direction of rotation is fixed F02 2 or 3 the direction of rotation is retained inside the inverter and the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power Failure Recovery DC Link Bus V
177. er between the inverter and host equipment Even though no response error detection time y18 has been set communications did not occur cyclically Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defective software hardware Relay converters e g RS485 relay converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings and defective hardware A communications error occurred during RS485 communications Option card What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no response error detection time invalid y18 0 Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS485 relay converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate 6 18 Possible Causes 5 Broken communications 6 Ahigh intensity noise was cable or poor contact given to the inverter 7 The RS485 communications card malfunctioned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been imple
178. er and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the connection wire length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque set F37 to 1 Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or more orders of class gt Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set F37 to 1 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set F37 to 1 For details of tuning errors refer to Errors during Tuning in Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 22 amp amp RS485 communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment Even though no response error detection time y08 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defective software hardware Relay converters e g RS485 relay converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Broken communications cable or poor contact
179. ere may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned off E Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 29 To access the slide switches remove the front and terminal block covers so that you can watch the control PCB For models of 37 kW or above open also the keypad enclosure For a screw terminal base close the control circuit terminal symbol plate since the plate being opened interferes with switching of some switches See Figures 2 27 and 2 28 For details on how to remove the front cover terminal block cover and keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover and Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks Figure 1 4 Table 2 12 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 12 Function of Each Slide Switch a SW1 Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW 1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SW1 to the SOURCE position D e eoe o Factory default SINK SINK SOURCE SW3 Switches the terminating resistor of
180. eriod Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit power for a time while it shuts down the power to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor since the contactor is directly powered from the main power Under such conditions the control circuit can issue a turn on command to the magnetic contactor but the contactor not powered can produce nothing This state is regarded as abnormal causing an alarm 6 13 13 4 Electronic thermal overload relay Problem Possible Causes 1 4 The characteristics of electronic thermal did not match those of the motor overload Activation level for the electronic thermal relay was inadequate The acceleration deceleration time was too short Load was too heavy 14 L Overload Problem Possible Causes 1 2 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications The torque boost setting F09 was too high The acceleration deceleration time was too short Load was too heavy Air vent is blocked The service life of the cooling fan has expired or the cooling fan malfunctioned The wires to the motor are too long and caused a large amount of current to leak from them Electronic thermal function for motor overload detection was activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F
181. erload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Adjust function codes F10 to F12 to decide the protection level Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 V maximum for 200 V class input 30 kW or less 230 V maximum for 200 V class input 37 kW or above when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 240 V maximum Suitable for use on a circuit capable or delivering not more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum for 400 V class input when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an inter rupting rating not less than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum Use 60 C 75 C Cu wire only Use Class 1 wire only Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 T1 must have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or MC ELCB etc 1 FRENIC ECO viii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION Install UL listed fuses or circuit bre
182. ermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV and or HLD or with the keypad E At the output secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter Note As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s output side may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power source to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar E Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power source 9 2 zm Name of option Function and application DC reactors A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied power factor DCRs reformation for reducing harmonic components 1 For power supply normalization Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more than the rated inverte
183. ernally fixed for starting automatic deceleration the output fre quency is controlled to prevent the DC link bus voltage from rising further thus regenerative energy is Suppressed N If automatic deceleration is enabled deceleration may take a longer time This is designed to limit the torque during deceleration and is therefore of no use where there is a braking load Disable the automatic deceleration when a braking unit is connected The automatic deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts operation which may make the acceleration time fluctuate In case the set deceleration time is so short the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly and consequently the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise In such a case prolong the deceleration time Even if the time period of 3 times of the deceleration time 1 F08 has elapsed after the inverter entered automatic deceleration there may be a case that the motor does not stop or the frequency dose not decrease In this case cancel the automatic decelera tion forcibly for safety and decelerate the motor according to the set deceleration time Prolong the deceleration time also Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the rate of decreasing the output frequency to prevent an overload condition Under this control an overload trip is prevented by decreasing the output frequency of the in verter before the inverter trips becau
184. erter type input Groandin Inverter Power kW L1 R L2 S L3 T g output Input Sc U V W Ctrl cet w DCR w o DCR FRO a 2 7 m rennirisoo s5 EE ae EET a fa az so fernor E eE s5 FRNeSFis 2 100 p FRN75F1S 20 on 2 4 0 3 FRN4 OF 1S 4E 22 FRNZOFISAO 30 FRNGOF1S 4D 37 FRNG7FIS 4D 45 FRN45F1S 40 _ 55 FRNSSF1S 40 ee 90 FRN90F1s 40_ 60 1 Use the terminal crimp with an insulation sheath or with processing by the insulation tube Use the insulated wire with allowable heat resistance to 60 or 70 C This selection assumes the inverter is used in ambient temperature at 50 C 2 When using the 150 mm wire in size apply the CB150 10 crimp terminal for low voltage appliance in compliance with JEM1399 or its equivalent 3 The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Power supply Control circuit Three phase 200 V N N _ jo O a O N Three phase 400 V 3 N o1 O Ee 60 o a z DCR DC reactor 2 14 2 3 5 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inver
185. etries failed the inverter will issue i alarm and stop Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the mode of deceleration when a run command is turned OFF Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration com mands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern and F08 Decelera tion time 1 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output The motor stops according to the inertia of motor and load machinery and their kinetic energy losses Not When the reference frequency is low the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop 5 71 H12 H30 y98 RS485 Communications RS485 Communications 3 O Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable 1 The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at
186. f that switching of any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result 5 45 1000 SS1 Select multistep frequency SS2 554 6 10 Enable 3 wire operation D 8 1008 Resetaam RST 1009 9 Enable extemal alarm tip HR 13 EnableDCbrake DOBRK 15 Switchto commercial power 50 Hz 6w 16 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz sweo 17 UP 18 Hz PID 5 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC 8 1038 Enable to run RE 39 ae Protect motor from dew condensation DWP 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial ISW50 power 50 Hz 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial ISW60 power 60 Hz 0 1050 Clear periodic switching time MCLR 51 1051 MEN1 52 1052 MEN2 Enable Pump Drive Motor 1 to 4 53 1053 MEN3 54 1054 MEN4 87 1087 Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 88 Lo 4 Run forward 2 FWD2 Runreverse2 REV Function code data Terminal commands assigned Symbol Active ON Active OFF w Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV FWD Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV REV 5 46 Any negative logic Active off command cannot be assigned to the functions marked Note M Wo with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example
187. fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before the overload protection occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload protection control H70 6 11 Note The 200V series inverters with a capacity of 45 kW or above and the 400V series inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or above each have a cooling fan fans for heat sinks and a DC fan for internal air circulation dispersing the heat generated inside the inverter For their locations refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 8 ZMZ Alarm issued by an external device Problem External alarm was inputted THR in case external alarm THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals X1 through X5 FWD or REV Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 An alarm function of the Inspect external equipment operation external equipment was Aetiated gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Connection has been Check if the wire for the external alarm signal is correctly connected to the performed incorrectly terminal to which the Alarm from exte
188. frequency Base Hz Base Hz requenc requenc 04 i E04 Variable torque characteristics F37 0 Constant torque characteristics F37 1 Ti When the variable torque load characteristics is selected in function code F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some motor itself and load characteristics In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output Voltage V Variable Torque Output using Non linear V f Pattern Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Constant Torque Output Non linear not using Non linear V f Pattern V f Pattern f Voltage H51 Output Frequency 0 Non linear V f Pattern Base Hz Frequency Frequency H50 F04 E Torque boost e Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient start torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Select an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output volt
189. frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Manual Speed Frequency Command Set with the N Q Keys and Requirements EINK OP Disable PID PID Control LED Frequency Multistep Multistep tee Pressing the N Q Selection Monitor Command 1 Frequency Frequency Control J01 SS2 SS1 Cu Hz PID keys controls PID output as final frequency command OFF PID enabled Manual speed fre quency command set by keypad ON PID disabled PID output as final frequency command OFF PID enabled Other than the above Manual speed fre quency command currently selected ON PID disabled F01 0 Link Disabled l LE OFF SS2 1 OFF PID Disabled Hz PID ON Manual Speed Command from Keypad Frequency Setting Other Than Above 3 O Command via Link Multistep Freq Command PID Output as Frequency Command Final Frequency Command 3 7 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the key decelerates the m ma PRN ae motor to stop The key is enabled only in Running mode E z ee aa oe r min m min The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of function code F02 E Operational relationship between function code F02 Run command and key Table 3 6 lists the
190. g e The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor e Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Motor No load current Motor R1 Motor X These function codes specify no load current R1 and X Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor If you perform auto tuning these parameters are automatically set as well e No load current Enter the value obtained from motor manufacturer e R1 Enter the value calculated by the following formula _ R1 Cable R1 ARI V1 V3x1 x 100 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A e X Enter the value calculated by the following formula X1 X2 x XM X2 XM Cable X X V V3 x1 x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A CN ote For reactance choose the value at the base frequen
191. g acceleration fiLic Overvoltage during deceleration jj Overvoltage during running at constant speed c FIH Overheating of the heat sink IH Z External alarm O Paes L E f H 4 Inverter overheat OA Motor protection PTC thermistor D eH Motor overload LIL Lf Inverter overload F LIG Blown fuse Por Charging circuit fault Er i Memory error Ei c Keypad communication error eE F CPU error Er Optional communication error Er 5 Option error err a Operation action error Er i Tuning error cs r a RS485 communication error Ei F Data save error due to undervoltage F RS485 communication error option Er H LSI error Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip error codes and their detailed description Cc 2 8 Refer to Section 8 6 Protective Functions 2 oO z z 5 Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 4 Storage Environment and Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Z Ww 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 and Section 2 3 7 Table 2 11 respectively 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad DCR Note 1 j Note 2 LO MCCB or Note 3 ELCB MC Power supply ss wwe Three phase x 200 to 240 V A 50 60 Hz x or three phase ee 380 to 480 V ai 50 60 H7 oT O for control circuits Note 4
192. g of Capacitor Inverter Status Motor Speed 5 55 HM Cooling fan in operation FAN Function code data 25 Under the cooling fan ON OFF control enabled H06 1 this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control E Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting is in progress The auto resetting is specified by H04 and H05 Auto resetting Refer to function codes H04 and HO5 for details about the number of resetting times and reset interval E Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this output signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the RS485 communications link or the field bus allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS485 communications link or field bus refer to the respective instruction manual E Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip 4 4 actually happens This signal c
193. hat makes loader software setting of function codes easy Options for Operation and Communications Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter Mounting FRENIC Eco series of inverters can be installed to your system enclosure or equipment using adapters mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters of FRENIC5000P11S 5 5 kW 15 kW or 30 kW series FRENIC5000P11S 7 5 kW 11 kW 18 5 kW and 22 kW models do not need this adapter Other peripheral equipment Attachment for This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC Eco series of inverters on the panel in sucha external cooling way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed t
194. he DC braking Output Frequency Start of Coast to stopping Hz DC Braking Braking Start Frequency F20 o Time DC Braking Braking Time F22 l lt gt DC Braking Braking Level F21 ee Time DC Braking Braking Response Mode H95 DC Braking Current Tip It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as a DC braking command DCBRk As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque In general specify data of the function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip Note l frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become un stable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur 5 40 F23 Starting Frequency F25 Stop Frequency At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency The inverter stops its output at the stop frequency Set the starting frequency to a level that will enable the motor to generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency at the
195. he leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 8 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED l l Refer Menu Menu monitor Main functions i shows i Quick Setup pees Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter Section operation 3 4 1 pe F codes fete Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions Control functions of frequency Selecting each of these R PS P codes function codes enables its Section Data Setting Motor parameters data to be dis 3 4 2 H eod s played changed High performance functions J codes Application functions y codes Link functions o code Optional function Note Displays only function codes that have been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data 3 Drive Monitor 5 Ac Displays the running information required for maintenance or Section ing Pome ae test running 344 4 I O Checking TONS Displays external interface information Section 3 4 5 5 Maintenance crue Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Section Information ae 3 4 6 as O Section 3 4 3 Alarm Informa E Displays the latest four alarm codes You may refer to the r
196. he wire Check whether the wire is connected across the terminals C1 and 11 gt Correct the wiring Check whether H91 is properly set gt Correct the setting 6 19 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar has appeared on the LCD monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 When PID control had Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is not set to been disabled J01 0 10 PID process command final or 12 PID feedback value Lio gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 You disabled PID control Make sure that when you wish to view a PID process command or a PID feedback value PID control is still in effect or JO1 is not set to 0 J01 0 when the LED vein is still i i monitor had bach sakto gt Set J01 to 1 Enable normal operation or 2 Enable inverse operation display the PID final poranio command value or PID feedback value by pressing the key 2 Connection to the keypad Prior to proceed check that pressing the amp key does not take effect for the was in poor connection LED display Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ___ _ under bar appears Problem Anunderbar ______ appeared on the LED monitor when you pressed the key or entered a run forward command
197. his terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF de celerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF de celerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 Signal Assignment to Y1 to Y3 Transistor signal Signal Assignment to Y5A C and 30A B C Relay contact signal E20 to E22 E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each ter minal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 Y2 and Y3 are transistor outputs and terminals Y5A C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deen ergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems CNote e When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g
198. iation gt Reconsider the power system configuration Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit breaker an earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Reconsider the capacity of the power source transformer Problem Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large Possible Causes 1 Main circuit power input wires broken 2 The terminal screws for the main circuit power input of the inverter were not tight enough What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the wires Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become loose Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 6 10 Possible Causes 3 Interphase unbalance rate of three phase voltage was too large Overload cyclically occurred Single phase voltage was input to the inverter instead of three phase voltage input What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter capacity Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage gt If the ripple is large raise the inverter capacity Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power FRENIC Eco cannot be driven by single phase power source Note You can disable input phase loss protection using the fun
199. ication since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of Shows the latest error that has occurred in optional RS485 communication in RS485 commu decimal format ee error For error contents refer to the RS485 Communication User s Manual MEH448a option C ae Option s ROM Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code KE version Cumulative Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor motor run time i i fee as The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ i above 3 26 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 11 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 19 lists the details of the alarm information ni x r LP rit List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred OL tO 5 PATA Seay Item nee Output frequency E gt Switching at approx OLO Item Output current Switching at approx oe 1 second intervals 1 ri i Lii gt z o Item PE Error sub code Switching at approx a Same as above Same as above z
200. ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure After a momentary power failure when power is restored and then a run command is input restart will begin at the starting frequency commanded by function code F23 This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 5 33 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage level while the inverter in running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter
201. ife of DC link bus capacitors Whether the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Load may vary significantly in the following cases Disable the judgment on the life during op eration and either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the actual use conditions e Auxiliary input for control power is used e An option card or multi function keypad is used e Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Detection of DC fan lock 200 V series 45 kW or above 400 V series 55 kW or above An inverter of 45 kW or above 200 V series or of 55 kW or above 400 V series is equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan When the inverter detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other cause you can select
202. igher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency F04 the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through PO3 and PO6 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteris tics or else perform auto tuning per P04 5 29 F10 to F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Select motor characteristics Overload detection level and Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal over load protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Note Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal motor overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor built in cooling fan or externally powered forced ventilation fan For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low
203. ile data was being saved when the power was turned OFF because the DC link bus was rapidly discharged A high intensity noise affected the operation of the inverter while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF The control circuit failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus electricity After pressing the key and releasing the alarm set using a remote keypad the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID process command back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control After pressing the key and releasing the alarm set using a remote keypad the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID process command back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if 4 occurs each time power is switched on gt This problem was caused by a problem of the printed circuit board PCB on which the CPU is mounted Contact your Fuji Electric representative 24 amp RS485 communications error Option card Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications diff
204. injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 10 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 10 Symbols Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals TE L1 R L2 S L3 T Connect the 3 phase input power lines inputs UVW o o V W Inverter outputs Connect a 3 phase motor RO TO Auxiliary power input for For a backup of the control circuit power supply connect AC the control circuit power lines same as that of the main power input P1 P DC reactor connection Connect a DC reactor DCR for improving power factor an option for the inverter whose capacity is 55 kW or below P N DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals R1 T1 Auxiliary power input for Normally no need to use these terminals Use these terminals for the fans an auxiliary power input of the fans in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter RHC series BG Grounding for inverter Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and and motor motor Earth one of the termin
205. ink bus voltage drops below the under voltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output of the inverter is shut down the motor enters a FEI coast to stop state but no undervoltage alarm issued When power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state When the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level upon a momentary power failure continuous running control is invoked Continuous running control regen erates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and prolongs the running time When an un dervoltage condition is detected due to a lack of energy to be regenerated the output frequency at that time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state When power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is ideal for fan applica tions with a large moment of inertia As soon as the voltage of the DC link bus drops below the undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output frequency at the time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state When power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is
206. ipolar Transistor IGBT internal Yes protection temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External alarm Line Yes input Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital input signal THR 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 17 Name Blown fuse Abnormal condition in charger circuit Electronic thermal overload PTC thermistor Motor protection Overload early warning Stall prevention Alarm relay output for any fault Memory error detection Keypad communi cations error detection CPU error detection Option communi cations error detection Option error detection Operation error detection LED monitor displays Description Upon detection of a fuse blown in the inverter s main circuit this function stops the inverter output Applicable to 90 kW or above for both 3 phase 200 V and 3 phase 400 V Upon detection of an abnormal condition in the charger circuit inside the inverter this function stops the inverter output Applicable to 45 kW or above 3 phase 200 V or 55 kW or above 3 phase 400 V In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Prote
207. ir previous settings then restart the operation Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt This problem was caused by a problem of the printed circuit board PCB on which the CPU is mounted Contact your Fuji Electric representative 16 amp c Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the remote keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Break in the communications cable or poor contact 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter 3 The keypad malfunctioned 17 amp 7 CPU error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Check that alarm does not occur if you connect another keypad to the inverter gt Replace the keypad Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes 1 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control a
208. ironment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust however do not use external cooling in an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust which tends to clog the heat sink For details refer to the Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 Installation Manual INR SI47 0880 and FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 External Heat Radiation 70 Internal Heat Coolin Radiation A Fans g 30 Internal Fans gt Heat Sink Internal Air Intake External a Air Intake Equipment Enclosure Figure 2 2 External Cooling ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident 2 2 To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above change the position of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as illustrated in Figure 2 3 Screws differ in size length and count for each inverter Be sure to refer to the table below Power supply voltage 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V Inverter type FRN37F1S 2C to FRN75F1S 2 0 FRN37F1S 4C to FRN110F1S 4 0 FRN132F1S 4 to FRN220F1S 4C Base fixing screw Count M6 x 20 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides M6 x 20 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides M6 x 20 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides M5 x 16 4
209. ised or upgraded in a non standard or incompatible manner Contact your Fuji Electric representative Figure 3 12 shows the menu transition in Menu 7 Data Copying The keypad can hold function codes for just one inverter Running mode wa PE CLI w I LIHI NS List of copying functions Data copying status gt End of read gt E ory cal Eng End of write so es Sil a uu ha s Write error Incompatible or code a ees ut p Tn HEr lt gt z End of verification mm aL a No data to be saved or Verification error mim fF iS isin verification error shows Blinking Figure 3 12 Menu Transition in Menu 7 Data Copying Basic keying operation 1 KR W N _ SE Sr Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Use the N and Q keys to display Data Copying 7 4 Press the Gs key to proceed to a list of copying functions e g EFJ Use the N and Q keys to select the desired function then press the key to execute the selected func tion e g Em7 will blink When the selected function has been executed u appears Press
210. istor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a sink for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a source for the output lt Control Circuit Programmabi lt Control Circuit Programmable l Logic Controller Logic Controller Photocoupler Current Photocoupler Current PLC serving as Sink b PLC serving as Source Figure 2 24 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit 2 29 Table 2 11 Continued e Y5A C General A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the purpose transistor output terminal Y1 Y2 or Y3 relay output Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos o 0 3 48 VDC 0 5 A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals Y5A and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals Y5A and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed Classifi cation 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to output stop the motor for any Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5Al emor 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 to Y3 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applica
211. item object to monitor and to output to the FMP terminal Those contents and amounts Definition of 100 are the same as those for function code F31 Refer to the table in function code F31 For FMI The inverter outputs monitoring data including output frequency and output current via terminal FMI in analog current level E Voltage adjust F34 Setting this function code adjusts the output current level of the selected monitor item within O to 200 as well as the function code F30 E Function F35 Setting this function code selects a monitor item to be output to terminal FMI as well as the function code F31 Command Assignment to X1 to X5 Command Assignment to FWD and REV Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON ACAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation the reference frequency and the motor drive power e g SS1 SS2 SS4 Hz2 Hz1 SW50 SW60 Hz PID IVS LE LOC and FR2 FR1 Be aware o
212. kage discoloration cracks and swelling of the case 2 Check if the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary Main circuit 3 Measure discharge 1 Visual or hearing inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No aan 1 Retighten 1 2 3 No abnormalities 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal Check that the terminals are not Visual inspection No abnormalities block damaged a inspection fe abnormalities 3 The discharge time is not shorter than time specified by the replacement manual time with capacitance probe Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise and Hearing visual and No abnormalities and reactor odor smelling inspection Check for chatters during operation Check for rough contacts Magnetic contactor and relay Printed circuit board 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation Control circuit 1 Check for abnormal noise and excessive vibration Cooling fan 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat Cooling system Ventilation Check the heat sink intake and exhaust path ports for clogging and foreign matter Visual inspection
213. ld start running When Local is selected in Remote Local switching the operation of the keypad concerning run commands varies with the setting of F02 For details refer to E Remote and local modes in Chapter 3 Section 3 3 3 Maximum Frequency F03 specifies the maximum frequency at which the motor can run Specifying the frequency out of the range rated for the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Set a maximum frequency appropriate for the equipment ACAUTION The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Note Modifying F03 data to apply a higher output frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high Base Frequency Rated Voltage at Base Frequency Non linear V f Pattern Frequency Non linear V f Pattern Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essen tially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 and H51 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or de crease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient
214. le 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of ac celeration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output Frequency ACC Time DEC Time Reference Reference Maximum ACC Time DEC Time Frequency ppm m dag Ee F03 Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is more than 10 of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is more than 20 of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference accel eration deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration deceleration time 5 68 HO9 H17 Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency linear torque but slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor Torque Output
215. le through the menu With the Gey key you can select the desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 11 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Eco A function code is displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad in the following format O rw LILI ID number in each function code group Function code group Table 3 10 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Eco Function Code Group Function Function Description Codes F codes FOO to F44 Fundamental Functions concerning basic motor running functions E codes E01 to E99 Extension Functions concerning the assignment of terminal func control circuit terminals tions Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control func Functions associated with frequency set tions of fre tings quency P codes P01 to P99 Motor Functions for setting up characteris
216. ll prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an acceleration deceleration time or frequency dif ferent from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE or Switch run command 2 1 command FR2 FR1 disables the key To enable the key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON a sudden start will occur Ensure that the Run command signal is turned OFF in advance Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 the
217. ls with Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase frequency of the command gt If an external potentiometer for frequency command signal converter switches or relay contacts are malfunctioning replace them gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g The higher priority run command is mistakenly canceled etc Check the data of function code F07 Acceleration time 1 gt Change the acceleration deceleration time to match the load 6 3 Possible Causes 6 Overload 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor 8 The current limiting operation did not increase the output frequency 9 Bias and grain set incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Lighten the load Check if mechanical brake is working gt Release the mechanical brake Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the pump In winter the load tends to increase In case auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether P02 P03
218. lse rate at 100 output 1 p s Y Y 1440 Pulse rate F34 Duty 0 Output pulse rate Fixed at 50 duty 1 to 200 Voltage output adjustment Pulse rate is fixed at 2000 p s Adjust the maximum pulse duty F35 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value PV DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Test analog output PID process command SV PID process output MV The shaded function codes L7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 f the carrier frequency is set at 1 kHz or below estimate the maximum motor output torque at 80 or less of the rated motor torque 2 The control printed circuit board the control PCB is equipped with either a screw terminal base or Europe type terminal block supporting FMP or FMI respectively The FMP enables F33 to F35 but the FMI enables only F34 and F35 so that F33 will not appear E Factory defaults F26 Inverter rated capacity kW Taiwan and Korea K 22 kW or below 30 to 75 kW 90 kW or above F code continued Code F34 Terminal FMI 1 F35 F37 F43 F44 Duty Function Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation Current Limiter Mode selection Level Change Refer Incre Default Data setting range Unit when f to ment copying setting running
219. lying a DC voltage signal within the range of 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V or 1 to 5 V between terminals 12 and 11 or manually by connecting a frequency command potentiometer to terminals 13 12 and 11 The inverter has either FMP or FMI depending on the type of the control printed circuit board control PCB For the wiring of the control circuit use shielded or twisted wires When using shielded wires connect the shields to earth To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wires as far away as possible from the main circuit wires recommended distance 10 cm or longer and never put them in the same wire duct Where a control circuit wire needs to cross a main circuit wire route them so that they meet at right angles 8 11 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models 8 12 FRNO 75F1S 20 FRN1 5F1S 20 FRN2 2F1S 20 FRN3 7F1S 20 FRN5S 5F1S 20 FRNO 75F1S 40 FRN1 5F1S 40 FRN2 2F1S 40 FRN3 7F1S 40 FRN4 0F1S 4E FRN5S 5F1S 40 The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination Unit mm Unit mm HOON ACAD pe We WS WAL DA 2xOB
220. m DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred 2 The power to the inverter was switched back on too soon with F14 1 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the range of the inverter s specifications 4 Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect 5 Other loads were connected to the same power source and required a large current to start running to the extent that it caused a temporary voltage drop on the supply side 6 Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because power transformer capacity was insufficient 5 d m Input phase loss What to Check and Suggested Measures Reset the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 3 4 or 5 depending on the load Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its control circuit was still operating gt Switch ON the power again after the display on the keypad has disappeared Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications Measure the input voltage to find where the peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections Measure the input voltage and check the voltage var
221. mented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter gt Replace the card 25 amp H LSI error Power PCB 45 kW or above 200 V series 55 kW or above 400 V series Problem Possible Causes 1 2 The capacity is not set properly on the control printed circuit board The contents of the memory on the power supply printed circuit board are corrupted Connection problem between the control printed circuit board and the power supply printed circuit board An error occurred in the LSI on the power printed circuit board power PCB What to Check and Suggested Measures The inverter capacity needs to be modified again gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative The power supply printed circuit board needs to be replaced gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative Either the control printed circuit board or the power supply printed circuit board needs to be replaced gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 26 fof Terminal C1 wire break Problem Possible Causes 1 2 3 The wiring to the terminal C1 is broken Wrong wiring Wrong setting The terminal C1 wire is broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the wire is broken gt Replace t
222. minals Digital output terminal Y1 to Y3 are assigned to bits O to 2 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output Y5A C is assigned to bit 4 and it is set to 1 when the circuit between Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30B and 30C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminals Y1A to Y3A is assigned to bits 12 to 14 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal circuits of Y1A to Y1C are closed and 0 when they are open For example if Y1 is on the circuit between Y5A and Y5C is open the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed and all Y1A to Y3A are open then is displayed on the LED4 to LED1 Table 3 17 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 17 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format LED a_i rac cee E EES z Tete RST XR XE X5 terminal Output 30 Binary CUEPESTUCAESCRESONERERE n I rt mI LED LILI monitor LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 No corresponding control terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to mg Displaying control I O signal terminals under communic
223. motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter 2 No forward reverse Operation command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation 3 No indication of rotation direction keypad operation 4 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode 5 Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped 6 The frequency command was set below the starting or stop frequency 7 Afrequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active 8 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker an earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt If only auxiliary control power is supplied turn ON the main power Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV
224. n Specification Remarks Station address No need to specify To use any keypad no setup is needed for RS485 communications related Synchronization system Asynchronous start stop system function codes y01 to y10 because their data is ignored Communications protocol Modbus RTU Communications system Half duplex Transmission speed 19 200 bps Parity Even Stop bits 1 bit Error checking CRC 16 8 5 8 3 Common Specifications Maximum frequency Base frequency Explanation Remarks 25 to 120 Hz 25 to 120 Hz Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 75 to 15 kHz 200 V 400 V 0 75 to 22 kW The carrier frequency 0 75 to 10 kHz 200 V 400 V 30 to 75 kW e 0 75 to 6 kHz 200 V 400 V 90 to 500 kW Carrier frequency Setting range Output frequency Accuracy Stability Setting resolution may drop automatically according to the ambient temperature or output current to protect the inverter This protective operation can be canceled by function code H98 e Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C Keypad setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Analog setting 1 1000 of maximum frequency ex 0 06 Hz at 60 Hz 0 12 Hz at 120 Hz Setting with Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 Hz or more A iW key e Link setting Selectable from 2 types 1 20000 of maximum frequency ex 0 003 Hz at 60 Hz 0 006 Hz at
225. n accident could occur Table 2 11 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise referring to the notes on the following pages 2 23 Table 2 11 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Symbol Name Functions 13 Potenti Power supply 10 VDC for the potentiometer that gives the frequency command ometer Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ Classifi cation power Allowable output current 10 mA supply 12 Voltage 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal mode operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback 3 Used as an additional auxiliary frequency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands Input impedance 22kQ The allowable maximum input voltage is 15 VDC If the input voltage is 10 VDC or more the inverter will interpret it as 10 VDC C1 Current 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input current input 4 to 20 mA DC O to 100 Normal mode operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback 3 Used as an additional auxiliary f
226. n the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range With overcurrent protection Fire could occur An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output secondary sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines E At the power source primary side Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source generally commercial factory power lines with the protection function built into the inverter or with the terminal signal line Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the power source side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually Note When your system requires the motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to th
227. n you start specifying or changing the frequency command or any other parameter with the WN Q key the lowest digit on the display blinks and starts changing As you are holding down the key blinking will gradually move to the upper digit places and the upper digits will be changeable If you press the N Q key once and then hold down the amp key for more than 1 second after the lowest digit starts blinking blinking will move to the next upper digit place to allow you to change the value of that digit cursor movement This way you can easily change the values of the higher digits e By setting function code C30 to 0 Enable WIO keys on keypad and selecting frequency com mand 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the WN Q key You can set up a frequency command not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items Motor speed load shaft speed and speed depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 or 7 Speed monitor items as shown in Table 3 3 3 5 E Make setting under PID control To enable PID control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be set or checked with the N and keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can access manual speed commands Frequency command with the N and
228. nal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol in Figures A to J make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main circuit terminals Table 2 6 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power Nominal menero Soe Tightening Grounding Tightening supply applied motor Inverter type screw torque STNE torque Refer to voltage kW size N m N m M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure A M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure A 4 0 FRN4 0F1S 4E Wes cere m2 48 apse Terminal RO TO Common to all types Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 1 2 N m Terminal R1 T1 Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 0 9 N m for the models of 200 V series 45 kW or above for 400 V series 55 kW or above The applicable motor rating of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 2 11 Figure A L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P N U VIW as Charging ole Lamp KE Figure B i A S7 RO TO ON Charging Lamp AAHS ALLL L4 RIL2 S L3 T Pt JP N U VIW amp amp GG cG Figure C Sw pox YN Charging Lamp FARRER Ababa kd L4 RIL2 S L3 T PIPINA U VIW amp amp G cG Fig
229. nction codes quickly Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory default setting of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data 4 1 15 a PAS Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test Factory setting Function code Name Function code data Taiwan and Asia A EU E Korea K Base frequency 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Rated voltage 22O HA a 9 W foes at base frequency 380 V 400 V 400 V GNI Motor parameter Motor ratings printed on the Rated capacity nameplate of the motor Applicable motor rated capacity Motor parameter Rated current Rated current of applicable motor 7 Motor Selection 0 Characteristic of motor 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors System design values Maximum frequency ee a equine of the motor 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz increase values so that they are Acceleration time 1 longer than your system design 20 0 s values If the set time is short the conn aa inverter may not start running the F Li Deceleration time 1 motor 20 0 s Gip In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring or auto energy saving since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure set forth bel
230. nd main circuit wires and communications cable gt Improve noise control 6 15 18 amp 4 Option card communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with 19 amp 5 Option card error the connection between the bus option card and the inverter There was a high intensity noise from outside A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the bus option card is properly mating with the connector of the inverter Reload the bus option card into the inverter Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable Reinforce noise control measures An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 20 amp amp Incorrect operation error Problem Possible Causes 1 The key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 The start check function was activated when H96 2 or 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned ON You incorrectly operated the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal or through the communications port the inverter was forced to decelerate to stop gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 With
231. ndary circuit the result of tuning can be unpredictable When you replace an inverter take note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 the leakage reactance X and the no load current and set those values to the new inverter s function codes 4 3 4 1 4 Test run A WARNING If the user set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions of the previous Section 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test and begin test driving of the motor ACAUTION If any abnormality is found to the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING rw 1 Turn the power ON and check that the LED monitor blinks while indicating the iii Hz frequency 2 Set the frequency to a low frequency such as 5 Hz using WIO keys Check that frequency command blinks on the LED monitor 3 Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the frequency command is displayed on the LED monitor correctly 4 To stop the motor press the key lt Check the following points gt e Check if the direction of rotation is forward
232. ng control and accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the preset acceleration time 5 69 STM ON Run Command ON Frequency Drop caused by Current Limit Frequency for idling B motor speed H17 Reference Frequence Motor Speed i i Searching for idling motor speed to follow Cote The frequency drop caused by the current limiting control during auto search for idling motor speed is determined by the frequency fall rate specified by H14 To use the auto search be sure to enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 E Select starting characteristic STM Digital input signal The STM terminal command specifies whether or not to perform auto search operation for idling motor speed at the start of running Select starting Data for H09 Auto search for characteristics Function idling motor speed terminal command Start at the starting frequency Start at the auto search frequency specified by H17 Start at the starting frequency E Frequency for idling motor speed H17 H17 specifies the auto search frequency for idling motor speed Be sure to set a value higher than the idling motor speed Otherwise an overvoltage trip may occur If the current motor speed is unknown specify 999 that uses the maximum frequency at the start of auto search operation E Auto search for idling motor speed H09 HO9 specifies the starting rotational direction forward reverse of th
233. ngs specified by function codes The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by run command 2 1 signals or commu nications link operation signal Run commands from the keypad in local mode The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in local mode Table 3 7 Run Commands from the Keypad in Local Mode a Input Procedures of Run Commands from Keypad 0 Enable Gun ron keys on keypad Pressing the key runs the motor in the direction specified by Motor rotational direction from digital ter command FWD or REV assigned to terminal FWD or REV minals FWD REV respectively Pressing the key stops the motor 1 Enable terminal command FWD REV Pressing the UN key runs the motor in the forward direction only 2 Enable Quy 6 keys on keypad Forward Pressing the 09 key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required 3 Enable GUY 8 keys on keypad Reverse Pressing the UN key runs the motor in the reverse direction only Pressing the key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required Switching between remote and local modes The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of the inverter To enable the switching you need to assign LOC as a digital input signal to any of terminals X1 to X5 by setting 35 to any of E01 to E05 E98 and E99 By factory def
234. nk Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Do not get on a shipping box Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause injuries Wiring A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the recommended cur rent range Use wires in the specified size Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected
235. nk operation Operation through RS485 communication and Field Bus communication option Operation command switch Remote local switch link switch second operation command switch Keypad operation Can be set with QI Y key External potentiometer 1 to 5 kQ 1 2 W Prepared by users Connected to analog input terminals 13 12 11 Analog input Can be set with external voltage current input E g 0 to 5 VDC 1 to 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC 0 to 100 terminal 12 V2 5 VDC is applicable A f with bias gain for 4 to 20mA DC 0 to 100 terminal C1 analog input Multistep frequency Selectable from 8 steps step 0 to 7 UP DOWN operation The frequency rises or lowers while the digital input signal is turned on Link operation Can be set with R8485 communications and field bus communications option Frequency setting change Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external signal digital input Changeover between remote and local keypad operation or frequency setup through communication is also possible Auxiliary frequency setting Inputs at terminal 12 C1 or V2 can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings Inverse operation The digital input signal and function code setting sets or switches between the normal and inverse operations e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Terminal 12 V2 gt 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Terminal C1 0 00 to 3600 s Acceleration
236. normal logic system is functionally equivalent to OFF active signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An ON active signal can be switched to OFF active signal and vice verse with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O signal terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code and then press the key The table below shows that the coast to stop command BX is assigned to the terminal X1 using the function code E01 If BX is ON the inverter coast to stops the motor If BX is OFF the inverter coast to stops the motor The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Eco series of inverters LJ If you find any not available here mark in the related page column of the function code tables refer to FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 for details 5 2 F codes Fundamental Functions Change Code Data setting range it when running Default setting FOO Data Protection Disable data protection Function code data can be edited Enable data protection FO1 Frequency Command 1 0 Enable Q Q keys on keypad Enable voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC Enable current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Enable sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Enable voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC
237. nsecutive occurrences will be updated 3 4 8 Data copying information Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 7 Data Copying is used to read function code data out of an inverter for which function codes are already set up and then to write such function code data altogether into another inverter or to verify the function code data stored in the keypad with the one registered in the inverter This subsection introduces restrictions and special notes concerning Data Copying E If data copying does not work oN Check whether or is blinking 1 If is blinking a write error any of the following problems has arisen e No data exists in the keypad memory No data read operation has been performed since shipment or a data read operation has been aborted e Data stored in the keypad memory contains any error e The models of copy source and destination inverters are different e Adata write operation has been performed while the inverter is running e The copy destination inverter is data protected function code FOO 1 e Inthe copy destination inverter the Enable write from keypad command WE KP is off e A Read data operation has been performed for the inverter whose data protection was enabled 3 29 2 If HE is blinking any of the following problems has arisen e The function codes stored in the keypad and ones registered in the inverter are not compatible with each other Either of the two may have been rev
238. nsition in Menu 1 Quick Setup Running mode Spe Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data B DOLD Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Tip Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual INR SI47 0890 E Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults initialize the whole data using function code HO3 data 1 3 13 Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 5 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default 0 Enable N Q keys on keypad to 2 Enable current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to TIL Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example 7 is displayed 2 If anything other than c is displayed use the
239. nsulation Test When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and operator box to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent high frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance in the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is shorter than 50 m If this length must be exceeded lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or recommended wire size When several inverters drive motors do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors xi Selecting inverter Capacity Transpor tation and storage Select an inverter according to the applicable motor ratings listed in the Driving gen standard specifications table for the inverter eral purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration motor is required select an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the standard Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations that meet the environmental conditions listed in Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage E
240. nto the memory and verify data in the memory L Upon pressing the key the inverter immediately displays 7 L CO n a To get out of the error state indicated by a blinking 77 or A amp E press the key 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked to issue an alarm and the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor E Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the key only when the alarm code is displayed E Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the N Q key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 32 E Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the N Q key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 19 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm
241. nverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 Production year Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric Systems products Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range
242. nvironment xii How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring instructions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Run ning Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 OPERATION This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are de scribed individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are req
243. o each bit total 6 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit 5 76 Judge the ak Lower the Detect DC life of DC jugoment perect our Detect input carrier fre phase loss quency automatically Function criteria of put phase DC link bus loss Capacitor Data 0 Enter into Disable Disable Disable Disable the alarm fan lock link bus Capacitor Continue Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable Example of Enter into Enable 1 Use the Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal the alarm factory expression state 0 default 0 19 5 77 Conversion table Decimal to from binary Binary Binary Decimal Decimal 32 pe e e e p eke h e ee 5 78 J21 Dew Condensation Prevention Duty When the inverter is stopped dew condensation on the motor can be prevented by feeding DC power to the motor at regular intervals to keep the temperature of the motor above a certain level To utilize this feature you need to assign a terminal command DWP dew condensation pre vention to one of general purpose digital input terminals function code data 39 E Enabling Dew Condensation Prevention To enable dew condensation prevention turn ON the condensation prevention command DWP while the inverter is stopped Then this feature starts E Dew Condensation Prevention Duty J21 The magnitude of the DC power applied to the motor is the same as the setting
244. o retry is ac tivated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state the inverter will auto matically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults If the protection function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried LED monitor dis LED monitor dis Alarm status Alarm status plays plays Instantaneous overcurrent ee A ON Darn Overvoltage protection LILI h CIT or LILI Motor overloaded Inverter overheated US E S E Number of resetting times H04 H04 specifies the number of auto resetting retry times for automatically escaping the tripped state If the protective function is activated more than the specified resetting retry times the inverter issues an alarm for any faults and does not attempt to escape the tripped state A WARNING If the retry function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 HO5 specifies the interval time to attempt performing auto resetting the tripped state Refer to the timing sch
245. o the outside Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your enclosure Other options Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or below On inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above you only need to re position the mounting bases 9 4 Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 1 Conformity with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL listed for Canada 10 1 1 General The UL standards originally established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc of U S are now a set of standards authorized in the U S for preventing fire and accidents thereby protecting operators service personnel and ordinary citizens cUL listed for Canada means that the products have been evaluated to the CSA Standards by the UL Therefore CUL listed products are equivalent to those in conformity with CSA Standards 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product certified by UL or cUL If you want to use the FRENIC Eco series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL listed for Canada certified product refer to the related guidelines described on pages viii and ix 10 2 Conformity with EU Directives The CE Marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC issued by the Council of the European Communities and the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EMC filter built in inverters that bea
246. ode P01 Load shaft speed r min Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 The 7 segment letters _ appear for 10000 r min or more fE J appear decrease function code E52 data so that the LED monitor dis plays 9999 or below referring to the above equation PID process N A Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be command controlled which is converted from the PID process command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID process command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be value controlled which is converted from the PID process command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears 3 18 E Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 12 Table 3 13 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 14 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Table 3 12 Running Status Bit Assignment BUSY y Ai function code data is being writ e 1 under voltage limiting control Always0 0 6e m Always 0
247. of 37 kW or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter operates or while it is turned ON Check if the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check if the surrounding environment satisfies Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection by following the items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor turn OFF the inverter and shut down power supply Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the ambient
248. of F21 DC Braking Braking level and its duration inside each interval is the same as the setting of F22 DC Braking Braking time The interval T is determined so that the ratio of the duration of the DC power to T is the value Duty set for J21 2 Duty for condensation prevention J21 x 100 T i T DC Braking Braking Time F22 i 6 a DC Applied DC Applied DC Braking Braking Level F21 Condensation Prevention Cycle 5 79 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNINGA If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to off reset the alarm Note that if the alarm is reset while any run commands are set to on the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may cause the motor to rotate Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30 kW or below or ten minutes for models of 37 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 37 kW or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped b
249. oltage f Undervoltage Level Time Reserved for Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON Command sate oF Ready to Run I I Waiting for Run command t No Power gt State of the Inverter Run command ON ON 4 Restart 5 34 When the power is recovered the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run com mand However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the waiting time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal stating sequence Note If a coast to stop command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit In a configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the momentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic contactor causing the contactor circuit to open When the contactor circuit is open the inverter is cut off from the motor and load and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not great
250. oltage is applied inadvertently preamen During running at L417 constant speed Stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops below the Yes 1 protection undervoltage level 200 VDC for 3 phase 200V 400 VDC for 3 phase 400 V series However if data 3 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This function prevents the Yes loss protection inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running and during running 4 Yes loss protection stopping the inverter output Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink temperature in case 4 7 Yes protection of cooling fan failure or overload Detects a failure of the internal air circulation DC fan and alarm stops the inverter For models of 45 kW or above in 200 V series 55 kW or above in 400 V series Stops the inverter output upon detecting an excessively high ambient temperature L477 Yes inside the inverter caused by a failure or an overload condition of the cooling fan Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate B
251. omes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip i417 temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip i tem perature minus 8 C This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200V series or 55 kW or above for 400V series has locked E Service life alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs DC link bus capacitor and cooling fan has expired This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200V series or 55 kW or above for 400V series has locked This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not For details refer to Section 7 3 Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm E Command loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is ina command loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed For details of the command loss detection refer to the descriptions of function code E65
252. on before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 4 1 lt Tuning procedure gt c cccceeeeseeeeeeeetesseeees 4 2 E Errors during tuning eerren errr 4 3 414 VESE UM aii a 4 4 a AOS e O S EE AA A 4 4 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 Overview of Function Codes cccccceeeeeees 5 22 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 6 2 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 000000 2 6 7 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 8 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 6 20 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 1 Daily Inspection anced inclined meih Preah nidea oes 7 1 7 2 Periodic Inspection cccccesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 7 3 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts WY TUN CIGUIE 15s cess siesasenkeaSsbustesuskeaawenabedeppaesesareseres 7 5 7 5 Insulation TES cscuavon des lateedctnlorateeelset etd ectenetds 7 6 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Gua
253. on time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency de creases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc Time 1 Dec Time 1 F07 Maximum F08 2 Frequency F03 Starting Stop Frequency Frequency F25 F23 Actual 7 Actual Acc Time Dec Time Note e If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual accelera tion deceleration times are longer than the specified times Refer to the descriptions of HO7 for details e If you specify an improperly long acceleration deceleration time the current limiting function or the automatic deceleration function regenerative bypass function may be activated resulting in an actual acceleration deceleration time longer than the specified one Torque Boost Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load FO9 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Variable General purpose fans and specified by FO9 Pumps require high start Constant torque load Auto torque Pumps require high start torque A motor may be boost over excited at no load FO9 Pumps requi
254. or above 5 65 400 V series motors shipped for Asia A Rated current No load current R X A Motor capacity Applicabl kW pplicable motor rating kW gt P03 PO7 P08 0 01 to 0 09 0 19 12 54 10 68 0 10 to 0 19 0 31 12 08 11 81 0 20 to 0 39 O N 0 58 12 16 12 14 0 40 to 0 74 O P 1 07 13 38 0 75 to 1 49 O N ol 1 72 8 72 10 82 1 50 to 2 19 3 10 6 89 11 80 2 20 to 3 69 6 73 11 40 3 70 to 5 49 6 04 11 73 5 50 to 7 49 5 55 15 05 7 50 to 10 99 N ol 4 78 15 59 11 00 to 14 99 _ 4 02 16 06 15 00 to 18 49 3 50 17 61 cae Oe N 18 50 to 21 99 3 16 17 97 22 00 to 29 99 N 2 92 17 32 30 00 to 36 99 O 2 84 16 10 37 00 to 44 99 2 99 17 77 45 00 to 54 99 2 75 17 54 55 00 to 74 99 oO 2 55 17 58 75 00 to 89 99 oO 2 15 18 30 90 00 to 109 99 1 87 17 35 aan Ea ie sci Weal ea E on al n rn oa 110 00 to 131 99 2 18 22 81 132 00 to 159 99 1 91 20 64 160 00 to 199 99 1 84 21 58 200 00 to 219 99 1 72 21 96 220 00 to 249 99 1 76 22 96 250 00 to 279 99 1 52 20 71 280 00 to 314 99 1 49 21 06 315 00 to 354 99 0 92 18 27 355 00 to 399 99 0 91 17 96 400 00 to 449 99 0 67 17 02 450 00 to 529 99 0 52 14 05 P02 Sowas 37 530 00 or above 0 58 14 16 5 66 H04 H05 Auto resetting Times Auto resetting Reset interval While the auto resetting feature is specified even if the protective function subject t
255. or control circuit terminals Check whether control terminal V2 is not set to the PTC thermistor input mode gt Turn the V2 PTC switch on the printed circuit board to V2 Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure the motor does not restart Possible Causes 1 2 The data of function code F14 is either O or 1 The run command stayed off even after power has been restored What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure mode selection to 3 4 or 5 Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command on While in 3 wire operation the power source to the inverter s control circuit went down because of a long momentary power failure or the HOLD signal was turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 6 6 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter main circuit power auxiliary power for control circuit The power for the control circuit did not reach a high enough level The keypad was not properly connected
256. ors 5 36 E Auto restart after a recovery from momentary power failure waiting time H13 This function specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regen eration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is recovered restart will not take place until the waiting time H13 has elapsed Power Failure Recovery f Y DC Link Bus Voltage ee ey Maan Undervoltage Level I l I I I l 4 I I i I I I I l I I I I I I I I I l I I i I I I State of the Inverter Runi i Operation 1 unning Ready to Run Run Command ON ON 13 Start Running Gate Signal ON Gate turned OFF Gate turned ON State of the Inverter Operation 2 Restart E Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long waiting time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case
257. ow The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product e The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Referring to the rating plate on the motor set the following function codes to their nominal ratings e F04 Base frequency e F05 Rated voltage at Base frequency e P02 Rated capacity e P03 Rated current 2 Selection of Tuning Process Check the situation of the machine system and choose between Tuning while the motor is stopped P04 1 and Tuning while the motor is running P04 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times FO7 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Data for Motor parameters l subject to Tuning Choose the process when The motor cannot be rotated or Primary resistance R1 Measure R1 and X while more than 50 of the rated load Leakage reactance X the motor is stopped would be applied on the motor if rotated Even if the motor is rotated it is safe and the load applied on the motor would be no more than 50 of the rating If you do the tuning with no load you will get the highest precision Measure R1 and X while Primary resistance R1 the motor is stopped and Leakage reactance X
258. page 0 to 200 Voltage output adjustment 5 45 Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y Y Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value PV DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Test analog output PID process command SV PID process output MV Variable torque load increasing in proportion to Y 1 5 27 square of speed Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Higher startup torque required Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Higher startup torque required Note Apply this setting to a load with short acceleration time Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost Note Apply this setting to a load with long acceleration time Disable No current limiter works Enable at constant speed apisabled during acceleration and deceleration Enable during acceleration and at constant speed 20 to 120 The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter for 100 1 The control PCB is equipped with either a screw terminal base or Europe type terminal block supporting FMP or FMI respectively The FMP enables F33 to F35 but the FMI enables only F34 and F35 so that F33 will not appear
259. pair of wires to these terminals you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected Note 5 Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility Note 6 The inverter has either FMP or FMI depending on the type of the control printed circuit board control PCB Note 2 xo 8 9 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands DCR Note 1 i Q Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 MC Main circuit Power supply aoe ors Meierei Three phase T i Motor 200 to 240 V oe cee J ry 50 60 Hz ae as era S Mie o o cae or three phase iy ae 380 to 480 V PA ij ce 50 60 Hz DCR ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit MC Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Magnetic Contactor MCCB Molded Case for control circuits Note 4 Aux power input for AC fans Grounding terminal Grounding Note 6 terminal Power supply for potentiometer ie lettre a Voltage input for i f l Alarm relay output 2 setting 0 to 10 VDC t ____ for any fault z Voltage input for gt Relay output 2 setting 0 to 10 VDC r x Current input for gt setting 4 to 20 mA DC t eA ly Analog meter ee DC Reactor H Breaker Digital inputs Circuit Breaker eon a i Transistor outputs When connecting a DC reactor D
260. parameters the tuning has failed or has aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output When the inverter is connected to a communications network via the RS485 port designed for the keypad detecting a communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code 4 4 If the data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm code When the inverter is connected to a communications network via an optional RS485 communications card detecting a communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code When an error occurred in the LSI on the power printed circuit board power PCB this function stops the inverter Applicable to 200 V series 45 kW or above and 400 V series 55 kW or above When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Protects the inverter against a surge voltage which might appear between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Upon
261. part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Loads were too heavy Measure the motor current with a measuring device and to trace the current trend Therefore use this information to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy decrease it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the Current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load variation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 6 8 Possible Causes 4 5 2 Problem 1 3 Problem The value set for torque boost F09 was too large F37 0 1 3 or 4 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Malfunction caused by noise What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not come to stall if you set a lower value than the current one for F09 gt Lower the value for torque boost F09 if the motor is not going to stall Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 and F08 gt Enable current limitig F43 gt Raise the inverter capacity
262. pcs each for upper and lower sides Table 2 3 Screw Count and Tightening Torque Case fixing screw Count M6 x 12 3 pcs for upper side M6 x 12 3 pcs for upper side M6 x 20 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides M5 x 12 4 pcs each for upper and lower sides Tightening torque Nem 5 8 3 5 Refer to Figure A Figure B Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination For models shown in Figure A 1 Remove all of the base fixing screws from the top and bottom of the inverter Also remove the case fixing screws from the top The case fixing screws are not necessary in external cooling Store them for future use On the bottom are no case fixing screws Secure the top mounting base to the center of the inverter with the base fixing screws using case fixing screw holes Secure the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter with the base fixing screws For models shown in Figure B Remove all of the base fixing screws from the top and bottom of the inverter Also remove the case fixing screws Secure the top mounting base to the center of the inverter with the base fixing screws using case fixing screw holes Set the removed case fixing screws to the screw holes where the top mounting bases were secured 3 In the same way secure the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter 2 3 Base Fixing Screws Top Mounting sides
263. peration and displays blinking If this happens the entire contents of the memory of the keypad will be completely cleared L of Write data Writes data stored in the keypad memory into the inverter s memory If you press the key during a write operation 4 is blinking the write operation that is under way will be aborted and 4 will appear blinking The contents function code data of the inverter s memory remain partly old and partly updated If this happens do not operate the inverter instead perform ini tialization or rewrite the entire data If any incompatible code is about to be written L appears blinking If this function does not work refer to E If data copying does not work on page 3 29 Verify data Verifies collates the data stored in the keypad memory with that in the inverter s memory If any mismatch is detected the verify operation will be aborted with the function code in disagreement displayed blinking Pressing the key again causes the verification to continue from the next function code Pressing the key during a verify operation 4 blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays blinking Err appears blinking also when the keypad does not contain any valid data Enable Data Enables the Data protection of data stored in the inverter s memory protection In this state you cannot read any data stored in the inverter s memory but write data i
264. phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 19 Frequency 5 to 5 Rated with DCR 3 2 6 1 8 9 15 0 21 1 28 8 42 2 57 6 71 0 84 4 114 138 167 203 282 334 410 current A 7 without DCR 5 3 19 5 13 2 22 2 31 5 42 7 60 7 80 1 97 0 112 151 185 225 270 I Main power supply Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz Phases Auxiliary control voltage power input frequency Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz for the terminals 7 e f L 2 Required power 7 supply capacity kVA 811 2 12 2 3 1 15 3 7 44 10 115 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 98 Torque 9 20 10 to 15 DC braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 60 DC reactor DCR Option Standard Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Applying Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Natural Cooling method cooling Mass kg Fan cooling 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V for three phase 200 V series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or trip
265. ping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1 kHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating 5 When an inverter is continuously running with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more in the ambient temperature of 40 C or higher manage its load current to be within the rated ones denoted in parentheses 6 Use R1 T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the terminals are not used 7 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 8 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 2 Average braking torque Neale Se Semin ol ee aia ax voltage Min voltage Three phase average voltage V X67 IEC OIEOD 2 0 2 2 If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR 10 Voltage unbalance Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V series E 0 75 to 55 kW Item Specifications Type FRN__ _F1S 4 D 0 75 11 5 122 37 5 5 7 114 115 5 22 30 4 0 9 Nominal applied motor kW 0 75 114 5 122 3 7 55 11 15 5 22 30 4 0 9 Rated capacity kVA 19 28 41 68 95 12 17 22 28 33 44 Rated voltage V Three phase 380 400 V 50 Hz 380 400 440 460 V 60 Hz with AVR function Rated current A 2 5 3 7 5 5 9 0 12 5 16 5 23 30 37 4
266. possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to CAUT O N dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application A WARNING e FRENIC Eco is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur FRENIC Eco may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though FRENIC Eco is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur e Do not place flammable matter nearby Doing so could cause fire ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat si
267. pply voltage An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or tripping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1 kHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating Use R1 T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the terminals are not used Calculated under Fuji specified conditions Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used Average braking torque Varies with the efficiency of the motor o Max voltage V Min voltage V Voltage unbalance Tres phascararage vollage N x 67 IEC61800 3 5 2 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 2 1 General specifications of keypad Protective structure Table 8 1 General Specifications Specification Front side IP40 Back mounting side IP20 Remarks Site to be installed In door Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed Ambient air No corrosive gas no inflammable gas no dust and no direct sunlight allowed Altitude 1000m or less Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration 3 mm maximum
268. quency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command 400 ms Frequency Command by Analog Input r f Command Loss Detected REF OFF Preset Frequency Command Internal Frequency Command In the diagram above f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command CNote Avoid abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command Otherwise a broken wire condition may be recognized When E65 is set at 999 Disabled though the command loss detection signal REF OFF is issued the reference frequency remains unchanged the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 is set at 0 or 999 the reference frequency level that the broken wire has been recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 is set at 100 or higher the reference frequency level of the broken wire fixing is f1 x 1 The command loss detection is not affected by the setting of Analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 5 59 E80 E81 C33 C38 C43 P01 P02 Detect Low Torque Detection level
269. r LiL LA Note that if this feature is enabled the motor noise increases Protection against input phase loss L 7 Upon detecting an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit because of phase loss or inter phase imbalance in the 3 phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 17 In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected a phase Note l loss or an inter phase imbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit TUI Protection against output phase loss 47 Output Phase Loss Upon detecting a phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work 5 75 Selection of life judgment criteria of the DC link bus capacitors Allows you to select the criteria for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor s reservoir ca pacitor s between factory default setting and your own choice CNote Before specifying the criteria of your own choice measure and confirm the reference level in advance For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Judgment on the l
270. r a CE Marking are in conformity with EMC Directives Inverters having no EMC filter can be in conformity with EMC Directives if an optional EMC compliant filter is mounted to them Inverters that bear a CE Marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive E The FRENIC Eco series of inverters is in conformity with the following standards Low Voltage Directive EN50178 1997 EMC Directive EN61800 3 2004 CAUTION The FRENIC Eco series of inverters is categorized as a restricted sales distribution class according to the EN61800 3 When you use these products in a domestic environment you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate any noise emitted from these products 10 3 Conformity with Low Voltage Directive 10 3 1 General General purpose inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric declares the inverters bearing a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 10 3 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product in conformity with Low Voltage Directive If you wish to use the FRENIC Eco series of inverters as a product in conformity with the Low Voltage Directive refer to the related guidelines described on pages vi and vii 10 1 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 4 1 General When a general purpose industrial inverter is to be used in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regul
271. r at an ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may need to be reduced 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a guideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board and the cooling fan are approaching their service life 1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with that at factory shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment wanna nnn nanan nanan nn nanan nanan nena manna na nnnnan Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any
272. r capacity In this case the percentage reactance of the power source decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF 2 For supplied power factor reformation harmonic component reduction Generally a capacitor is used to reform the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and reform the power factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 86 to 90 Note At the time of shipping a short bar is connected across the terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the short bar when connecting a DCR Output circuit Include an OFL in the inverter power output Secondary circuit to filters 1 Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor input terminals ORES This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents by the 400 V class of inverters 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when th
273. r or LSI error caused by noise or some other 7 factors this function stops the inverter Upon detection of an error in the communication between the inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output When an option card has detected an error this function stops the inverter output STOP key priority Pressing the key on the keypad forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is running by any run command given via the terminals or communications link After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm Not applicable 8 18 Alarm output 30A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Name Operation error detection Tuning error detection RS485 communi cations error detection Data save error during undervoltage RS485 communi cations error detection optional LSI error detection Power PCB Retry Surge protection Command loss detected Protection against momentary power failure Overload prevention control Description Start check function The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays 4 4 on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run command is present when Powering up An alarm is released the key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source During tuning of motor
274. ra Shows a maximum temperature inside the inverter for every hour ture He the Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C inverter Max temperature Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour of heat sink Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C muy Max effective Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour output current Unit A amperes Capacitance of Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor the DC link bus in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to Chapter 7 capacitor MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitor time of electrolytic mounted on the printed circuit board capacitor on the Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 99 99 1 c rmz Printed circuit When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is board shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 99 99 1 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 99 990 2 hours the count stops and the display re mains at 99 99 1 Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan time of the cooling This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code fan H
275. ransition between alarm codes at different occurrences in Alarm mode 3 2 Power ON Running mode Programming mode Menu driven Monitoring of running status Speed monitor Hz E 50 00 k Quick Setup QP Data Setting Input power kW E g Menu 1 Data Setting Calculated torque oa Menu 0 tr LI Output voltage V E Data Checking e g a Motor output Menu 3 Load factor Menu 4 Eo so PID process command Menu 5 E g O 00 PID feedback value Menu 6 E g 9 00 Menu 7 Analog input Alarm occurs Current alarm code Latest alarm code 2nd latest alarm code Eg 3rd latest alarm code E g 1 In speed monitor you can have any of the following displayed according to the setting of function code E48 Output frequency Hz Motor speed r min Load shaft speed r min and Speed 2 Applicable only when PID control is active J01 1 or 2 3 Applicable only when the analog signal input monitor is assigned to any terminals 12 C1 or V2 by E61 E62 or E63 20 4 Applicable only when the full menu mode is active E52 2 Figure 3 2 Transition between Basic Display Frames by Operation Mode 3 3 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode In this mode you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency output current 2 Set up the frequency command and others and 3 Run stop the motor
276. rantee 7 7 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONG cccccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 Standard Models ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V Series cceeeeeeee eens 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V series c cece 8 2 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 6 8 4 8 2 1 General specifications of keypad 8 4 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad 8 4 8 2 3 Data transmission specifications 8 5 8 3 Common Specifications s15 c06lecds tetessiieadrecctandeou deed 8 6 8 4 Terminal Specifications ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 8 4 1 Terminal functions cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad 8 9 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal COMIMANGS A 8 10 8 5 External Dimensions ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 12 8 5 1 Standard models aAnvachonwsenwnnnan 8 12 8 5 2 DC reactor ineo nenen aeei 8 15 8 5 3 Keypader nnana eh een 8 16 8 6 Protective Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 THONS reed ees eia Ea Ee a 9 1 Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 1 10 1 Conformity with UL Standards and Canadian Stan dards cUL listed for Canada cccceeceeeeerees 10 1 10 1 General nen ere ree en ene nap er rar 10 1 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product certified
277. rated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 50 1050 Clear periodic switching time MCLR 51 1051 Enable pump drive motor 1 MEN1 52 1052 Enable pump drive motor 2 MEN2 53 1053 Enable pump drive motor 3 MEN3 54 87 E05 X5 1054 Enable pump drive motor 4 MEN4 1087 Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 88 Run forward 2 FWD2 89 Run reverse 2 REV2 Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively E code continued Change pede Data setting range Unit when pee Peau en _ lcopying setting E20 Signal Assignment to Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding Transistor sig nal Y1 function to terminals Y1 to Y3 Y5A C and 30A B C E21 y2 2S listed below a Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown E22 Y3 below assigns a negative logic input to a terminal PRS E24 Relay contact signal 0 1000 Inverter running a Y5A C 1001 Frequency arrival signal 10 2 1002 Frequency detected E27 B0A B C 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 5 1005 Inverter output limiting 6 1006 Auto restarting after mo mentary power failure 7 1007 Motor overload early warning 10 1010 Inverter ready to run 11 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line SW88 Switch motor dri
278. re high start torque Pumps require high start torque A motor may be over excited at no load Constant torque load Auto torque boost Variable General purpose fans and torque load Torque boost pumps specified by If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the linear torque it is recom mended to apply the linear V f pattern factory default 5 27 FRENIC Eco is a series of inverters exclusively designed for fans and pumps whose Note torque loads are characterized by a term of variable torque load that is a torque load increasing proportional to square of the load speed FRENIC Eco cannot drive any linear torque load even if you select a linear V f pattern If you attempt to drive a linear torque load with a FRENIC Eco inverter the inverter s current limit function may be activated or an insufficient torque situation may result and you would need to reduce the inverter output For details contact your Fuji Electric representative E f characteristics The FRENIC Eco series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which in clude V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high start torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V 100 Rated voltage 100 Rated voltage Torque Output Torque Output boost g aye boost l
279. re in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay has a contact problem replace the relay Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is enabled gt Set P02 P03 and PO6 properly and perform auto tuning in accordance with P04 gt Enable load selection for higher startup torque F37 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wire as short as possible Cancel the automatic control system automatic torque boost and energy saving operation F37 overload prevention control H70 and current limiter F43 then check that the motor vibration is suppressed gt Cancel the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the data of the oscillation suppression gain H80 currently set to appropriate values Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 If grating sound can be heard from motor Possible Causes 1 2 The carrier frequency was set too low The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Resonance with the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Check
280. re the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within that of the specifications If within the same power source a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current may be caused in the input power Install a DC reactor Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 gt Enable the regenerative braking H69 3 or automatic deceleration H71 1 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve braking ability Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 6 9 Possible Causes 5 Braking load was too heavy 6 Malfunction caused by noise 4 Undervoltage What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve braking ability Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the alarm occurred gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 gt Enable the auto resetting H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise Proble
281. reduction filter that applies to the analog input voltages entered via terminals 12 and V2 the current entered via terminal C1 For details refer to function codes C33 C38 and C43 Terminal 12 C1 and V2 Analog in put Filter time constant e Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency commands 1 and 2 For details refer to function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 e You can modify the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 F01 by using the selection C53 and switching IVS of normal inverse operation For de tails refer to the description of Switch Normal Inverse Operation IVS in function codes E01 to E05 Run Command F02 selects the source issuing a run command for running the motor Keypad Enables the Gun keys to start and stop the motor The direction of rotation is determined by the commands given at terminals FWD and REV External signal Enables the external signals given at terminals FWD and REV to run the motor Keypad Enables uN 609 keys to run and stop the motor Forward rotation Enables only forward rotation You cannot run the motor in the reverse direction There is no need to specify the di rection of rotation Keypad Enables Gun keys to run and stop the motor Reverse rotation Enables only reverse rotation You cannot run the motor in the forward direction There is no need to specify th
282. relationship between function code F02 settings and the key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 6 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor In the direction commanded by the terminal Note FWD or REV Forward key disabled Reverse The motor is driven by terminal command FWD or REV In the forward direction the motor shown here In the reverse direction For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Note When the keypad is in use for specifying the frequency settings or driving the motor do not disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running Doing so may stop the inverter Note The rotational direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of 3 8 E Remote and local modes The inverter can be operated either in remote or local mode In remote mode that applies to ordinary operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter whereas in local mode that applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under the control of the keypad e Remote mode The run and frequency commands are selected by source switching signals including function codes run command 2 1 signals and communications link operation signal e Local mode The command source is the keypad regardless of the setti
283. requency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands Input impedance 250Q The allowable input current is 30 mA DC If the input current exceeds 20 mA DC the inverter will interpret itas 20 mA DC V2 Voltage 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal mode operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback J Q D 2 Cc lt 3 Used as an additional auxiliary frequency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands Input impedance 22kQ The allowable input voltage is 15 VDC If the input voltage exceeds 10 VDC however the inverter will interpret it as 10 VDC Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection Ensure that the slide switch SW5 on the control PCB is turned to the PTC position refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate The figure shown at the right illustrates lt Control Circuit gt the internal circuit diagram where SW5 C 10 VDC switching the input of terminal V2 between V2 and PTC is turned to the Operation level PTC position For details on SW5 refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide Comparator switches and handling control circuit External terminal symbol plate In this case Resistor nam you must change
284. rial that can withstand temperatures of this level A WARNING Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the enclosure of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the enclosure as the temperature around the inverter will tend to increase Do not install the inverter in a small enclosure with poor ventilation 2 1 Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Output current Atude derating factor 1000 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them 5 5 kW or less the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the enclosure of your system or other dustproof containers Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Top 100 mm Bottom 100mm 50 mm for models of 400 V series 90 KW or above
285. rnal equipment has been assigned Any of E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 is set to 9 gt Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly 3 Incorrect settings Check if the Alarm from external equipment has not been assigned to an unassigned terminal assigned E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the assignment normal negative logic of the external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 gt Ensure that the polarity matches 9 GHz Inside of the inverter overheat Problem The temperature inside the inverter exceeded the allowable limit Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The ambient temperature Measure the ambient temperature exceeded the allowable limit specified for the inverter gt Lower the ambient temperature by improving the ventilation 10 G44 Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor rose abnormally Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor motor exceeded that of motor specifications gt Lower the temperature 2 Cooling system for the Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally Motor man ENCres gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g ligh
286. rol Hao daa Folow HO data Via field bus option Via field bus option Loader Link Function Frequency command Runcommand Y Mode selection o Folow H30 and yas data Falow H30 and 8 data Via RS485 link Loader Via RS485 link Loader 5 21 5 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Eco series of inverter For details of the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES FOO F01 C30 Data Protection FOO specifies whether function code data is to be protected from being accidentally changed by keypad operation If data protection is enabled F00 1 the WIO key operation to change data is disabled so that no function code data except F00 data can be changed from the keypad To change F00 data simultaneous keying of 67 A from 0 to 1 or 67 Q from 1 to 0 keys is required Tip Even when F00 1 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals For details refer to function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 Frequency Command 1 Frequency Command 2 F01 selects the source of reference frequency 1 F01 or reference frequency 2 C30 for specifying the output frequen
287. rotective cap Figure 10 9 Point B 10 8 FRN200F1S 40 FRN220F1S 4C 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below Point B Figure 10 10 Internal Location Diagram FRN200F1S 4L FRN220F1S 4L Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 1 8 N m Wire end terminal aR ey Figure 10 11 PointA Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 3 5 N m Screw M5 Protective cap Wire end terminal Figure 10 12 Point B 10 9 Note The wiring change in Note 1 can improve the EMC compliant level of the inverter for an environment or class however it increases the leakage currents listed in Table 10 1 to the ones listed below Make sure that these leakage currents are allowable for your system requirements beforehand EMC compliant E current eA filter model Power supply voltage Inverter type Normal condition condition Worst condition condition FRN110F1S 4 0 ERNO SA aiias eee FRN132F18 40 3 phase 400 V FRN160F1S FRN160F 18 401 108 0 464 0 Coorg 40 FS5536 400 99 1
288. rough the keypad or the communications link is automatically turned OFF E Errors during tuning Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning it will display and discard the tuning data Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning An inter phase imbalance has been detected Abnormal result of tuning Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Abnormal output current An abnormally high current has been caused during tuning During tuning the Run command has been turned OFF or forced STOP Sequence error coast to stop command BX dew condensation protection DWP or a similar abnormal command has been received During tuning a certain limitation has been reached or exceeded Limitation exceeded The maximum output frequency or the peak limiter for output frequency has been reached or exceeded Other alarm condition An undervoltage or an alarm has been occurred If any of these conditions has occurred either eliminate the abnormal or error factor s and perform tuning again or contact your Fuji Electric representative C t If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter OFL LILILI 4A is connected to the inverter s output seco
289. rrecting capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter onto the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit or ground Connect a surge absorber in parallel with a coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor 3 Leakage current Harmonic component current generated
290. s 4 38400 bps y05 Data length y06 Parity check 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity y07 Stop bits 2 bits 1 bit y08 No response error 0 Cee O detection 1 to 60 detection E O y09 Response latency time 0 00 to 1 00 at oe y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Metasys N2 Available only for products shipped for Asia A and EU E 5 20 y code continued Code yi1 y12 y13 yi4 y15 y16 y17 y18 y19 y20 y98 y99 _ Change Data setting range i when RS485 Communication Option Station S Communications error processing Immediately trip and alarm ErP Trip and alarm after running for the period specified by timer y13 Retry during the porion speciicn by timer y13 If retry fails trip and alarm If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run Error processing timer Transmission speed 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps Data length Parity check 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stop bits i 2 bits 1 bit No response error 0 No detection detection time 1 to 60 Response latency time 0 00 to 1 00 eee eae Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol 3 Metasys N2 Available only for products shipped for Asia A and EU E Mode section
291. s OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given E inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Current limiter Mode selection and Level e Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 e Automatic deceleration H69 3 Note When the IOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from or dropped below the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function E Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 3 Enable restart Continue to run 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart a
292. s to avoid an UL trip Deceleration The motor loss increases during deceleration to reduce the load energy regenerating at the characteristic inverter to avoid an L trip upon mode selection Automatic energy The output voltage is controlled to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter loss saving operation at a constant speed Overload protection The output frequency is automatically reduced to suppress the overload protection trip of control the inverter caused by an increase in the ambient temperature or motor load or by other operating conditions Auto tuning The motor parameters are automatically tuned Cooling fan ON OFF Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature is low An external output can control be issued in a transistor or relay output signal Pump control An inverter controls multiple driving pimps at a time combining with driving sources of the inverter and commercial power The inverter s integrated PID controller controls them in the flowrate pressure and so on The inverter controls each member of pump control sequences issuing the power source switching signal between the inverter output and commercial power Two control modes are available One is a fixed motor driving mode where the inverter exclusively controls the single pump Another is a cyclic motor driving mode where the inverter cyclically controls a member of pumps Fixed motor driving mode Pumps under control
293. sary Figure 3 7 shows the menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Programming mode bse Lie E C i gt List of function codes Function code data E Ne ari a times SALE 1 lt a Save data and go to the next function code T Go to the next function code Go to the next function code G P Pressing the Gms key when the 45 data is displayed returns to Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Changing F01 F05 and E52 data only Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 1 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 Tip To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode For details refer to E Limiting menus to be displayed on page 3 11 3 16 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 11 Figure 3 8 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON mode List of monitoring items Running status info 4950 Output frequency D E Output current
294. se of the overheating of the cooling fan or the overloading of the inverter with an alarm indication of Li or LiL This control is useful for facilities such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is nec essary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency goes low o0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 specified by F08 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 9 Disable overload prevention control CNote In applications where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load this function is of no use and should not be enabled PID Feedback Wire Break Detection If all of the following conditions are satisfied during the period 0 1 to 60 0 s specified by H91 an alarm 4 will be issued Setting H91 at 0 0 s disables wire break detection The input current on the terminal C1 is less than 2 mA The terminal C1 is used for the feedback input of PID control E62 5 Under the PID control Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later Tip The inverter s ROM version can be checked on Menu 5 Maintenance Information 5 i 5 74 H94 H97 H98 Cumulative Run Time of Motor You can view the cumulative run time of the motor on the keypad This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system With this function code H94 you can set the
295. ss these function codes Select 0 10 for models of 45 kW or above 200 V series and 55 kW or above 400 V series 0 20 for models of 37 kW or below 200 V series and 45 kW or below 400 V series Select 2 for models of 45 kW or above 200 V series and 55 kW or above 400 V series O for models of 37 kW or below 200 V series and 45 kW or below 400 V series Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later J codes Application Functions i Change Code Data setting range i when running J01 PID Control 0 Disable Mode selection 1 Enable normal operation Enable inverse operation J02 Remote process 0 Enable Q Q keys on keypad command 1 PID process command 1 Enable terminal command UP DOWN control Command via communications link J03 P Gain J04 Integral time J05 JO6 Feedback filter J10 Anti reset windup J11 Select alarm output Absolute value alarm Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch J12 Upper limit alarm AH 0 to 100 ah fede es Ne TT eo J13 Lower limit alarm AL O to 100 Ce E Ee ee J15 Stop frequency 0 Disable Hz for slow flowrate 1 to 120 J16 Slow flowrate level 1 to ee stop eee O J17 Starting frequency 0 Disable Hz 1 to 120 J18 Upper limit of
296. st F09 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 and H51 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check whether the frequency command signal is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor Check the wiring connection A DC reactor is built in for 75 KW or above models FRENIC Eco inverter cannot run without a DC rector gt Connect the DC reactor correctly Repair or replace wires for the DC reactor 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low 2 The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low 4 Afrequency command e g multistep frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low 5 The acceleration time was too long What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 Maximum frequency gt Readjust the data of F03 Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter high gt Readjust the data of F15 Check the signals for the frequency command from the control circuit termina
297. t Base 0 2 to 22 5 min frequency x 33 Rated current fre oan 30 to 45 x 150 q y Base x 33 frequency 55 to 90 10 min x 83 110 or above E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor The time constant is the time until the electronic thermal overload protection detects the motor overload while the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 has flown The thermal constants of most gen eral purpose motors including Fuji motors are set at about 5 minutes for capacities of 22 kW or below or about 10 minutes for capacities of 30 kW or above by factory default Example When function code F12 is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm con dition alarm code i when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when
298. t terminals R1 and T1 for the fan Inverters 200 V series 45 kW or above and 400 V series 55 kW or above are equipped with these terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inerter works with the DC linked power input whose source is a power regenerative PWM converter e g RHC series these terminals are used to feed power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration The fan power is Single phase 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz for 200 V series 45 kW or above Single phase 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz for 400 V series 55 kW or above 2 22 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high electric field i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident A CAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise A
299. t the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command generator Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual MEH456 Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings e g cancel the higher priority run command Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter high and F16 Frequency limiter low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones 6 2 Possible Causes 9 The coast to stop command was effective 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor 11 Overload 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 13 Miss weak connection of the DC reactor DCR What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the cabling and wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In winter the load tends to increase Check that a mechanical brake is in effect gt Release the mechanical brake if any Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boo
300. t the starting frequency beforehand 5 54 E Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm i and shuts down its output This signal comes ON when the current exceeds the level specified by E34 Overload early warning Note Function code E34 is effective for not only the OL signal but also for the Current detected signal ID E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Select AX terminal function AX Function code data 15 In response to a run command FWD this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command and it goes OFF after the motor decelerates to stop because of a stop command received This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast to stop command or when an alarm occurs L1 R to L3 T UV W Power Source Motor Y5A AX FWD FRENIC ECO 52 1 MC in primary circuit Run Command FWD AX 52 1 E S E Preparation foi running E g Chargin
301. t voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or tripping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1 KHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating 5 Use R1 T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the terminals are not used 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque Varies with the efficiency of the motor 2 The nominal applied motor of FRN4 0F1S 4E to be shipped for EU is 4 0 kW 10 Single phase 380 to 440 V 50 Hz or Single phase 380 to 480 V 60Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V x 67 IEC61800 3 5 2 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR 11 Voltage unbalance Note A box O in the above table replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 75 to 500 kW Ty pe FRN F1S 40 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 Nominal applied motor kW 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 Output ratings Rated capacity KVA 105 128 154 182 221 274 316 396 445 495 563 Rated voltage V Three phase 380 400 V 50 Hz 380 400 440 460 V 60 Hz
302. tance between the wires will increase resulting in an outflow of the leakage current It will activate the overcurrent protection increase the leakage current or will not assure the accuracy of the current display In the worst case the inverter could be damaged If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors If an output circuit filter is installed in the inverter or the wires between the motor and the inverter are too long the actual voltage applied to the motor would drop measurably because of the voltage drop over the filter or the wires As a result the output current may fluctuate because of an insufficient voltage In such installations set the voltage on the higher side by setting the function code F37 Load Selection Auto torque Boost Auto energy Saving Operation to 1 Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Higher start up torque required or selecting a non linear V f pattern using the function codes H50 and H51 Non linear V f pattern Frequency and Voltage Use an output circuit secondary filter of OFL OOO DA 2 17 CNote Driving 400 V series motor e If a thermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect the motor from overheating the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring length shorter than 50 m In this situation add an output circuit filter option
303. tandard RS485 port Refer to Figure 2 35 RJ 45 Connector Modular Jack Remote Operation Extension Cable CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S or LAN cable Enclosure Keypad RJ 45 Connector To RJ 45 Connector on Inverter Figure 2 35 Connecting a Keypad and an Inverter s Standard RS485 port Not Do not connect the inverter to a PC s LAN port Ethernet hub or telephone line doing so may damage the inverter or the equipment on the other end E Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Follow the step in li Mounting it on the enclosure wall HM Retracting the keypad into the inverter Put the keypad in the original slot while engaging its bottom latches with the holes as shown below and push it onto the case of the inverter arrow while holding it downward against the terminal block cover arrow Terminal Block Cover Figure 2 36 Retracting the Keypad 2 36 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component which may affect other loads and power factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power source as the inverter If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter It may also be necessary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor co
304. tarting Frequency 040600 1 to 60 0 ra eae ea The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 2 Values in parentheses in the above table denote default settings for the EU version E Torque boost per motor capacity by factory defaults F09 p80 220 F code continued Change Code Data setting range an i when Derault setting F26 Motor Sound 0 75 to 15 22 kW or below 1 Refer to Carrier frequency 0 75 to 10 30 to 75 kW table 0 75 to 6 90 kW or above below F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 F29 Analog Output FMA 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Mode selection 1 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F30 Output adjustment 0 to 200 F31 Analog Output FMA Select a function to be monitored from the followings Function Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value PV DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Test analog output PID process command SV PID process output MV F33 Pulse Output FMP 2 25 to 6000 Pu
305. tarting at line frequency can be made with a digital input signal SW50 SW60 A built in line inverter switching sequence performs sequence control with a digital input signal ISW50 ISW60 to output a signal SW88 SW52 1 SW52 2 for controlling an external magnetic contactor MC As a built in sequence two types can be selected including the one switching automatically to the line upon an inverter alarm PID control Capable of PID regulator control for process Process commands Key operation UP and DOWN keys 0 to 100 Analog input terminal 12 V2 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Analog input terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 UP DOWN digital input 0 to 100 e Communication RS485 Bus option 0 to 20 000 0 to 100 Feedback value e Analog input terminal 12 V2 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 e Analog input terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Accessory functions Alarm output absolute value alarm deviation alarm Normal operation inverse operation Sleep function Anti reset windup function PID output limiter Integration reset hold Auto search for idling Starting at the preset frequency the inverter automatically searches the idling motor speed motor s speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it without stopping it Automatic deceleration Upon a DC link bus voltage exceeding the overvoltage limit level during deceleration the deceleration time automatically extend
306. ted current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteris tics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their braking power must be supplied from the primary circuit If the brake power is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C The heat sink of the inverter may become hot under certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Combina tion with peripheral devices Wiring Installing an MCCB or RCD ELC
307. ten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 function In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound carrier frequency F26 6 12 Possible Causes 4 The set activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was inadequate 5 APTC thermistor and pull up resistor were connected incorrectly or the resistance was inadequate 6 The value set for the torque boost F09 was too high 7 The V f pattern did not match the motor 8 Wrong settings What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Reconsider the data of function code H27 Check the connection and the resistance of the pull up resistor gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an appropriate resistance Check the data of function code F09 and readjust the data so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data to a lower value gt Readjust the data of the function code F09 Check if the base frequency F04 and rated voltage at base frequency F05 match the values on the nameplate on the motor gt Match the function code data to the values on the nameplate of the motor Although no PTC thermistor is used the V2 PTC switch is turned to PTC which means that the thermistor input is active on the PTC H26
308. tenance Information in Programming mode and check the accumulated run time of the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor adjusted with ambient temperature and is used as the basis for judging whether it has reached its service life The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours 3 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the accumulated run time of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run The display is in units of 1000 hours The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 7 4 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y3 and relay contact terminals Y5A Y5C and 80A B C as soon as any component exceeds its judgment level Note The judgment level differs by inverters ROM version as listed below The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan on 200 V series inverters with 45 kW or above on 400 V series inverters with 55 kW or above has been detected Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm
309. ter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned on 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring Secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the devices recommended ones within the related current range Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise fire could occur Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output circuit Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter Otherwise electric shock or
310. th the ON OFF of LED seg ments Terminal input signal Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking Slate inne xagecinel I O signal status for details format Terminal output signal status in hexa decimal format No of consecutive oc This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively currences Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 i Overlapping alarm 1 n is displayed if no alarms have occurred E Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 Gs ii Overlapping alarm 2 p hese H is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communication con trol displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS485 communications control Refer to mg Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details Terminal input signal status under communication con trol in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status under communica tion control in hexadecimal format Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm Note When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first and last occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences inbetween will be discarded Only the number of co
311. the cable guide plate for models of 0 75 kW to 22 kW For inverters of 22 kW or below use the cable guide plate to secure IP20 protective structure Follow the steps to work on it E Removing the cable guide plate Before to proceed remove the terminal block cover in advance Remove the cable guide plate fastening screw and pull the cable guide plate Cable Guide Plate Fastening Screw Figure 2 10 Removing the Cable Guide Plate FRN15F1S 2 1 A box L replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination E Opening half punched holes and mounting rubber bushes D Tap the three half punched holes of the cable guide plate by using a screwdriver grip end or the like and punch them out C Note Be careful not to injure yourself by sharp cutting edges of parts Set the three attached rubber bushes in the punched holes Make cut outs on the rubber bushes before wiring ZX Half punched Holes Cable Guide Plate Cut outs Attached Rubber Bushes Figure 2 11 Punching out the Holes and Mounting the Rubber Bushes A WARNING Be sure to use the rubber bushes If not a sharp cutting edge of the cable guide plate hole may damage the cable sheath This may induce a short circuit fault or ground fault A fire or an accident may be caused E Mounting the cable guide plate Mount the cable guide plate following the steps illustrated in Figure 2 10 in reverse Tightening torque 1 8 Nem 2 10 2 3 3 Termi
312. the data of function codes F26 Motor sound carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Readjust the setting of F27 to appropriate value Measure the temperature inside the enclosure of the inverter gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load In the case of a fan or a pump lower the setting data of the frequency limiter F15 Note If you disable H98 an 4 4 LHJ or LiL Li alarm may occur Check the precision of the mounting of the load or check whether there is resonance with the enclosure or likes gt Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter and determine where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency band so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance 6 5 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time Possible Causes 1 2 7 The inverter ran the motor by S curve or curvilinear pattern The current limiting prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration The automatic regenerative braking was active Overload Torque generated by the motor was insufficient An external frequency command is being used The V2 P
313. the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL 6 14 15 amp Memory error Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 While the inverter was writing data especially initializing data or copying data power supply was turned OFF and the voltage for the control circuit dropped 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter while data especially initializing data was being written 3 The control circuit failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if pressing the key resets the alarm after the function code data are initialized by setting the data of HO3 to 1 gt Return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Improve noise control Alternatively return the initialized function code data to the
314. the same time CNote Function codes F43 and F44 have current limit functions similar to that of function code H12 Since the current limit functions of F43 and F44 implement the current control by software an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limit by F43 and F44 enable the current limit operation by H12 as well to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm When setting the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteris tics and moment of inertia of the load Communications Link Function Mode selection Bus Link Function Function selection H30 and y98 specify the sources of a frequency command and run commancd inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS485 communications link standard or option or field bus op tion H30 is for the RS485 communications link and y98 for the field bus Using the communications link function allows you to monitor the operation information of the inverter and the function code data set frequency commands and issue run commands from a remote location LE Selected Inside Inverter Command Standard RJ 45 0 t If no LE is assigned the Command Source will be selected
315. tics pa parameters rameters such as capacity of the motor H codes H03 to H98 High perform Highly added value functions ance functions Snr Functions for sophisticated control J codes J01 to J22 Application Functions for applications such as PID functions Control y codes y01 to y99 Link Functions for controlling communication functions o codes 027 to 059 Optional Functions for options Note functions Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables E Function codes requiring simultaneous keying To modify the data for function code FOO Data protection H03 Data initialization or H97 Clear alarm data simultaneous keying is needed involving the 6 A keys or 670 V keys E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Some function code data can be changed while the inverter is running whereas others cannot Further depending on the function code modifications may or may not validate immediately For details refer to the Change when running column in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables For details of function codes refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables 3 12 Figure 3 4 shows the menu tra
316. ting alarm signal THM H code continued Change Code Name Data setting range when running Data Default setting H30 Communications Link Frequency command Run command mugen FO1 C30 F02 Mode selection 4 RS485 link F02 F01 C30 RS485 link RS 485 link RS485 link RS 485 link Option F02 RS485 link Option RS485 link F01 C30 RS485 link Option RS 485 link RS485 link Option RS 485 link Option RS485 link Option ONOaABRWBNH OO H42 Capacitance of DC Link Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to Bus Capacitor FFFF Hexadecimal H43 Cumulative Run Time of Indication of cumulative run time of cooling fan for Cooling Fan replacement H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to Link Bus Capacitor FFFF Hexadecimal shee shipping H48 Cumulative Run Time of Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit Capacitors on the Printed board 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal Resettable Circuit Board H49 Select Starting 0 0 to 10 0 Characteristics Auto search time for idling motor speed O e lt lt z z z z lt 2 amp H50 Non linear V f Pattern 0 0 Cancel Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 or below 5 0 30 kW or above 1 Refer to Y2 table below H51 Voltage 0 to240 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 200 V series 0 to500 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 400 V series H5
317. tion Card ick ala A by H30 and or y98 Field Bus 77 Option Command sources selectable Command sources Description Sources except RS485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 and C30 or multistep frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals Inverter itself Via RS485 communications link Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad standard Wie RS405 communications link Via RS485 communications link option card option card Via field bus option Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP 5 72 Command sources specified by H30 Inverter itself Inverter itself F01 C30 Inverter itself F02 iia e RS485 communications link inverter itself F02 standard inverter itself F01 C30 Via R8485 communications link standard Via RS485 communications link Via RS485 communications link standard standard Via RS485 communications link Inverter itself F02 option card Via RS485 communications link Via RS485 communications link stan option card dard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS485 communications link option card Via RS485 communications link option card 7 Via RS485 communications link standard Via RS485 communications link op tion card Command sources specified by y98 O o emee woe Combination of command source Frequency command Via R8485 Via R8485
318. to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Connect a molded case circuit breaker an earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary Check if the short bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is poor contact between the short bar and the terminals gt Connect the short bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P or retighten the screws Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists 2 The desired menu is not displayed Causes 1 The limiting menus 3 function was not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad menu display mode gt Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu can be displayed Data of function codes cannot
319. tor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Note If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Check whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met Note he condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment Electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board Move to Menu 5 Main
320. turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 22 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following J Q w b D Q Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Programmable ae Programmable Pe lt oat phe Control Circuit gt Cae seat lt Control Circuit gt 24 VDC a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 22 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate 2 27 Table 2 11 Continued Symbol Functions FMA The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC current 4 to 20 mA is output You can select either one of the output switching the slide switch
321. uired for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Eco series of inverters Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC Eco series of inverters comply Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full effi ciency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents C Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information xiii Table of Contents Preface o aeea Retire thet een veel han vette neat i E Safety PreCAaUtlOM Scns ceeccte dee eahedee ne hodee eadocneetioneeeseretecenecahe i E Precautions for use 4c0i neko x How this manual is organized eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee xiii Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 1 2 External
322. un Section tion e ning information at the time when the alarm occurred 3 4 7 i ere Allows you to read or write function code data as well as veri Section Til LILI E APRS Copying fying it 3 4 8 Note An o code appears only when any option is mounted on the inverter For details refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding option 3 10 Figure 3 3 illustrates the menu driven function code system in Programming mode Power ON Programming mode Menu driven Quick Setup Menu 0 Running mode Menu 1 Menu 2 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 I O Checking Menu 4 Maintenance Info Menu 5 Bee Menu 6 Data Copying moro LETI Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in the Programming Mode E Limiting menus to be displayed The menu driven system has a limiter function specified by function code E52 that limits menus to be displayed for the purpose of simple operation The factory default E52 0 is to display only three menus Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting and Menu 7 Data Copying allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 9 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Menus selectable Function code data editing mode Menu 0 Quick Setup factory default Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 7 Data Copying 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 7 Data Copying Full menu mode Menu 0 through 7 Tip Pressing the A Q key will cyc
323. unction code data 11 Turning this digital input signal ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 Hz1 F01 and frequency command 2 Hz2 C30 If nothing is assigned to this terminal command the frequency specified by F01 takes effect by Frequency command Frequency command source Hz2 Hz1 default OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 a Follow C30 Frequency command 2 E Enable DC brake DCBRK Function code data 13 Turing this terminal command ON activates the DC braking As long as this command remains ON the DC braking is working regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Furthermore turning this command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque Note For details refer to the description of F20 to F22 5 48 E Enable write from keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning this terminal command OFF disables changing of function code data from the keypad Only when this command is ON you can change function code data from the keypad according to the setting of function code FOO as listed below Disable editing of all function code data except that of FOO ie Enable editing of all function code data Inhibit editing of all function code data except that of FOO If the WE KP comman
324. ure 2 6 Removing the Covers FRN15F1S 2 1 A box LJ replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 2 6 E Mounting the covers Q Put the front cover to the inverter case while fitting the edge of the front cover between the both hinges provided on the inverter case Slide it upward until the front cover latches Fit the latches on the terminal block TB cover in the holes provided to the front cover and push it towards the inverter case Tighten the TB cover fastening screw on the terminal block TB cover Tightening torque 1 8 N m Front Cover Hinge Hole Hole men Viewed from Latch Latch d D TB Cover TB Cover Fastening Screw Terminal Block TB Cover Figure 2 7 Mounting the Covers FRN15F1S 20 gt A box LJ replaces A K or E depending on the shipping destination 2 7 2 For inverters with a capacity of 37 kW to 160 kW E Removing and mounting the covers QA To remove the front cover loosen the four fastening screws on it hold it with both hands and slide it upward Refer to Figure 2 8 Put the front cover back in reverse order of the Make sure to properly match the position of the screw holes on both of the front cover and inverter case Table 2 5 Screw count and tightening torque Power supply voltage Inverter type TAS N ti Three phase 200 V FRN37F1S 20 to FRN75F1S 20 M4x8 4 pcs l FRNG7FIS 4L to FRNTIOFTS4ACI
325. ure D o Charging Lamp H KA zale RR ZERELEREE Sw Figure E pes Charging Lamp 2 12 Figure F Figure G Figure H Figure J CONO L1 R L2 S L3 T L1 R L2 S L3 T GG a Q 2 HARS O U V Charging ele s R1 T1 Ke Charging Vy R1 T1 RO TO 4s Charging RO TO 47s OY Charging 7 s Lamp N Oo Charging as Lamp 2 The control circuit terminals common to all models E For the screw terminal base Screw size M3 Tightening torque 0 7 N m E For the Europe type terminal block Dimension of openings in the control circuit terminals for Screwdriver to be used AiGwable wie gies Europe type terminals Head style Th Flat head AWG26 to ae Manufacturer of Europe type terminals Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to Table 2 8 Table 2 8 Recommended Europe Type Terminals Screw size With insulated collar Without insulated collar AWG24 0 25 mm Al0 25 68U AWG22 0 34 mm Al0 34 6TQ A0 34 7 AWG20 0 5 mm Al0 5 6WH A0 5 6 eam AWG18 0 75 mm Al0 75 6GY A0 75 6 Head thickness 0 6 mm 2 13 2 3 4 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 9 lists the recommended wire sizes Those for main circuits are examples for using a single wire for 60 70 C at an ambient temperature of 50 C Table 2 9 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm 1 Nominal Main circuits applied Main circuit power Auxiliary Auxiliary motor Inv
326. utput for any alarm ALM 1 Values in parentheses in the above table denote default settings for the EU version 2 Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later E code continued Default a Data setting range setting page 5 58 Hysteresis width 3 0 0 to 120 0 Overload Early Warning Disable Current Detection ae value of 1 to 150 of the inverter rated current eas E40 PID Display Coefficient A 999 to0 00 to 999 1 0 01 E41 PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 999 1 E43 LED Monitor Speed monitor Select by E48 Item selection x Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Input power PID process command Final PID feedback value PID output Load factor Motor output Analog input Frequency Detection 0 0 to 120 0 FDT Detection level 0 01 E45 LCD Monitor 2 Running status rotational direction and operation Item selection guide Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection 0 Japanese English German French Spanish Italian E47 Contrast control 0 Low to 10 High E48 LED Monitor Output frequency Speed monitor item 3 Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Display speed in E50 Coefficient for Speed 0 01 to 200 00 Indication E51 Display Coefficient for 0 000 Cancel reset Input Watt hour Data 0 001 to 9999 E52 Keypad Function code data editing mod
327. ve source between commercial power and inverter output For primary side SW52 2 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For secondary side SW52 1 15 1015 Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side AX 25 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY 27 1027 Universal DO U DO 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 30 1030 Service life alarm LIFE 33 1033 Command loss detected REF OFF 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 37 1037 Current dete cted ID 42 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 43 1043 Under PID control PID CTL 44 1044 Motor stopping due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP 5 1045 Low output torque detected U TL 4 1054 Inverter in remote operation RMT 5 1055 Run command activated AX2 6 1056 Motor overheat detected PTC THM 9 1059 Terminal C1 wire break 2 C1 OFF O 1060 Mount motor 1 inverter driven M1_1 1061 Mount motor 1 commer cial power driven M1_L 2 1062 Mount motor 2 inverter driven M2_ 1 3 1063 Mount motor 2 commer cial power driven M2_L 4 1064 Mount motor 3 inverter driven M3_ 1 65 1065 Mount motor 3 commer cial power driven M3_L 67 1067 Mount motor 4 commer cial power driven M4_L 68 1068 Periodic switching early warning MCHG 69 1069 Pump control limit signal MLIM 99 1099 Alarm o
328. vel E31 Hysteresis width E32 Release level Time Frequency detected FDT Time Available for inverters having a ROM version 1400 or later Tip The inverter s ROM version can be checked on Menu 5 Maintenance Information ITAN Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level Overload Early Warning Current Detection Timer E34 and E35 specify in conjunction with output terminal signals OL and ID the level and duration of overload and current beyond which an early warning will be issued E Overload Early Warning The warning signal OL is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code i _ of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The signal turns on when the current level specified by E34 Overload early warning is exceeded In typical cases set E34 to 80 90 against data of F11 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Select motor characteristics and F12 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL Motor overload early warning data 7 to any of the digital output terminals E Current Detection The signal ID turns on when the output current of the inverter has exceeded the level specified by E34 Curr
329. verload alarm L With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled see function code H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F12 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor Disable Tone level 0 Enable Tone level 1 Enable Tone level 3 Enable Tone level 2 If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or me Not RENT chanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor Analog Output FMA Mode selection Output adjustment Function These function codes allow you to output to terminal FMA monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in the form of an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable E Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FMA You need to set switch SW4 on the control PCB accordingly referring to the table below Data for F29 Positioning slide switch SW4 PPUT mounted on the control PCB EEEE E ae ae The current output is not isolated from the analog input and does not have its own Note independent power source Therefore this output must not be connect
330. versal AO Motor output Analog output test PID command PID output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ This output is capable of driving up to two meters with 10kQ impedance Driven by the FMI The monitor signal for analog DC current 4 to 20 mA is output You can select one of the following signal functions with function code F35 Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Analog output test PID command average DC voltage of the output pulse train Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 200 CM Digital Two common terminals for digital input signal terminals and an output terminal FMP common These terminals are electrically isolated from other common terminals 11 s and CMY Pulse train output These are the shared terminals with the common terminal CM s of the digital inputs The control PCB is equipped with either a screw terminal base or Europe type terminal block supporting FMP or FMI respectively Note that terminals FMP and FMI cannot coexist in an inverter so that the function code F35 shares the identical function selection for these terminals 2 28 Table 2 11 Continued Functions Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early output 1 warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 to Y3 by
331. wer supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection C Ti It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems Auxiliary power input terminals RO and TO for the control circuit In general the inverter will run normally without power supplied to the auxiliary power input for the control circuit However if you share the input power for the control circuit with that for the main circuit you would be lost when in the event of an error or alarm you turn OFF the magnetic contactor between the inverter and the commercial power supply If the magnetic contactor is turned OFF the input power to the control circuit is shut OFF causing the alarm signals 30A B C to be lost and the display on the keypad to disappear To secure input power to the control circuit at all times supply the power from the primary side of the magnetic contactor to control power auxiliary input terminals RO and TO Auxiliary power inpu
332. y this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered T 1 The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule

INR-SI47-1059b_E - Fuji Electric GmbH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents